Cars and technology: 2003 Ford f150 owners manual

Posted By: Freddist August 17, 2015
Tenth generation of Ford F-150 was launched in 1997 with an improved interior, fuel efficiency and aerodynamics. It was offered with V6 and V8 engines. For rear seats, third door is used. Ford F150 Tenth generation (1997-2003) is basically one of the best automobiles with latest features. Our technicians have studied and worked on all model years of Ford F150 and have provided relevant detail to assist the customers. It is our foremost endeavor that relevant model years should be kept within one factory manual. This generation is comprised of 7 model years starting from 1997 to 2003. Content in these service manuals covers bumper to bumper tune up, maintenance, repair work, installation, and maintenance.
Ford F-150 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 Manual content:

V8 and V6 engine specifications
Driveline
Gear box
Gasket
Battery installation
Air filter
Oil change
Oil filter
Water pump
Shock absorber
Radiator
Headlights
Fog lights
Tail lights
Bumper
Wipers and blades
Power windows
Installation of mirrors
Automatic door lock system
Ignition coil
Steering
Brakes
Climate control system
Audio and video system
Air conditioning and heating system
Seat belts
Navigation system
Lane departure
Exhaust system
ABS
Electrical system
Wiring diagrams

Language: English
File: PDF
Size: 699.4 Mb
Free download Ford F-150 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 factory repair manual PDF
https://yadi.sk/d/IsrFSFR4iV3eP

Ford 2003 F150 Owner's Manual, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Electronic automatic temperature control Rear window defroster Lights Headlamps Turn signal control Bulb replacement Driver Controls Windshield wiper/washer control Steering wheel adjustment Power windows Mirrors Speed control Locks and Security Keys Locks Anti-theft system 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Changing tires Jump starting Wrecker towing Customer Assistance Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) Cleaning Maintenance and Specifications Engine compartment Engine oil Battery Fuel information Air filter(s) Part numbers Refill capacities Lubricant specifications 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation. Copyright © 2003 Ford Motor Company.
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.
(miles) of operation, since these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the Maintenance and specifications chapter for more information on oil usage. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
This information may be stored during regular operation or in a crash or near crash event. This stored information may be read out and used by: • Ford Motor Company. • service and repair facilities. • law enforcement or government agencies.
F150 SuperCrew, F150 5.4L Supercharged “Lightning” and Harley-Davidson F-150 Owners: Snowplowing Your vehicle is not recommended for snowplowing. Ford makes no representation as to the suitability of your vehicle for snowplowing, in particular regarding the potential for exceeding vehicle weight limits, airbag (SRS) deployment sensitivity, vehicle crash integrity, or powertrain durability.
Introduction Using your vehicle as an ambulance Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package. Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
By referring to the pages in the provided supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this Owner Guide for all other required information and warnings. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Brake Fluid - Anti-Lock Brake System Non-Petroleum Based Traction Control AdvanceTrac Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe Windshield Rear Window Defrost/Demist Defrost/Demist 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Battery Acid or Sparks Explosive Gas Fan Warning Maintain Correct Fluid Power Steering Fluid Level Emission System Engine Air Filter Passenger Compartment Jack Air Filter Check fuel cap Low tire warning 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Standard instrument cluster Optional instrument cluster Harley—Davidson instrument cluster DOOR THEFT AJAR 60 70 80 RPMX1000 SELECT/RESET km/h SERVICE ENGINE SOON P RN BRAKE CRUISE PREMIUM UNLEADED FUEL ONLY 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your servicing dealership. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Oil pressure/Engine coolant: Illuminates when any of the following conditions has occurred: • The engine coolant temperature is high. • The engine oil pressure is low. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Anti-theft system (if equipped): Flashes when the Securilock Passive Anti-theft System has been activated. Door ajar: Illuminates when the ignition is in the ON position and DOOR any door is open. AJAR 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off (and the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened. GAUGES Standard instrument cluster gauges Optional instrument cluster gauges 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. Odometer: Registers the total kilometers (miles) of the vehicle. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Add oil if needed. If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your dealership or by a qualified technician. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
ON position). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade. Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
3. CLK: To set the hour, press and hold CLK. Then press SEEK to decrease or increase hours. To set the minute, press and hold CLK and press TUNE to decrease or increase the minutes. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Press TUNE to change frequency down/up 11. Seek: Press and release for previous/next strong station, selection or track. 12. Power/volume: Press to turn ON/OFF; turn to increase or decrease volume levels. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
17. Cassette door: Insert a cassette into the cassette door. AM/FM STEREO / SINGLE CD RADIO 14 15 16 17 18 VOL - PUSH ON BASS TREB FADE DISC SEEK TUNE COMP DISCS SHUFFLE 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
AM stations and 12 FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). 9. CD: Press and hold until desired selection is reached. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
15. AM/FM: Press to choose a frequency band in radio mode. 16. Bass: Press increase/decrease the bass output. 17. Treble: Press increase/decrease the treble output. 18. CD door: Insert a CD printed DISC side up. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player.
Show TYPE: Displays the station’s call letters and format. Setting the clock: Press RDS until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is displayed. Use the SEL control to manually increase/decrease ( the time. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
CD in the CD changer (if equipped). 14. Scan: Press to hear a brief SCAN sampling of radio stations or CD tracks. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
19. CD door: Insert a CD, label side up. PREMIUM IN-DASH SIX CD SOUND SYSTEM 1. Seek: Press and release SEEK for previous/next strong station, or track of current disc. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Use with MENU to set the clock and engage RDS. 8. Balance: Press BAL; then press to shift sound to the left/right speakers. Fade: Press FADE; then press to shift sound to the rear/front speakers. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Press and momentarily hold AM/FM. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
17. Disc/Tune: Radio: Press to manually tune down or up the frequency band. CD: Press to select the previous or next track on the CD. 18. CD door: Insert a CD label side 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Press again to stop. Tape/CD: Press SCAN to sample tape/CD selections for eight seconds. Press again to stop. 3. CD Door: Insert the disc with the playing side down and printed side up. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
To set the minute, press CLK control until SELECT MIN is displayed then press SEL to decrease the minutes or to increase the minutes. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
15. Side 1–2: Press to play reverse side of the tape. 16. Fast Forward (FF): Press to fast forward the tape. 17. Rewind (REW): Press to rewind the tape. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
The rear seat controls allow the rear seat passengers to operate the radio, tape, CD or CD changer or in-vehicle entertainment system mode (if equipped). To engage, simultaneously press the memory preset controls 3 and 5. Press again to disengage. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed. CASSETTE/PLAYER CARE • Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather: 1. Select 2. Set the temperature control to full heat 3. Set the fan speed to HI 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EATC) SYSTEM 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
5. Floor/defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster and floor vents. 6. Floor: Distributes outside air through the floor vents. 7. Panel/floor: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel and floor vents. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats. • Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Ensure that the ignition is ON position. Press to turn the defroster ON/OFF. The indicator light will illuminate when ON. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
The foglamps can be turned on only when the headlamp control is in position and the high beams are not turned on. Pull headlamp control towards you to turn foglamps on. The foglamp indicator light will illuminate. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
High beams Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate. Pull the lever towards you to deactivate. Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by a qualified service technician. TURN SIGNAL CONTROL • Push down to activate the left turn signal. • Push up to activate the right turn signal. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
The rear dome lamp can be turned ON (center) or OFF (right) by sliding the control. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
“E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
2. At the back of the headlamp, pull clips rearward and up (about ⁄ inch) to release the headlamp assembly. 3. Slide headlamp assembly forward and disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open the hood. 2. Remove screw from the lamp assembly and disengage lamp assembly by pulling straight forward, to disengage two hidden snap-in retainers. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
4. Remove bulb socket from the lamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise. 5. Pull bulb straight out of socket and press in the new bulb. Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
3. Pull out the old bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb. 4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
3. Pull out the old bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb. Install the new bulb in reverse order. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
2. Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard. 3. Replace wiper blades every 6 months for optimum performance. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Press the OPEN control to open the storage compartment. The door will open slightly and can be moved to full open. The storage compartment may be used to secure sunglasses or a similar object. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
SELECT control on the overhead console. The temperature can be displayed in Centigrade or Fahrenheit by pressing the SELECT control. The ignition key must be in the ON or ACC position. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
4. Press the SELECT control until the desired zone number appears. The display will flash and then return to normal operation. The zone is now updated. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Use the power point. Auxiliary power point (Harley-Davidson F-150 only) A additional auxiliary power point is located on the lower rear side of the console. The power point is accessible from the rear seats. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, in vehicle communications systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Accessory delay (if equipped) With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until any door is opened. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
R to adjust the right mirror. 2. Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror. 3. Return to the center position to disable the adjust function. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
P (Park) position. Press and hold the rocker control to adjust accelerator and brake pedal toward you or away from you. The adjustment allows for approximately 76 mm (3 inches) of maximum travel. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
You can also use the COAST control to operate the Tap-Down function. Press and release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1.6 km/h (1 mph). 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• To close, press and hold (as ROOF desired) the front portion of the moon roof control. • To halt motion at any point during one-touch opening, press the control a second time. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage. Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink. It is 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with step 2 in the “Programming” section. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
All you have to do is push a button and begin speaking. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
The indicator light will flash green twice. 2. To delete all recorded messages, simultaneously press and release the PLAY and REC buttons at the same time. The indicator light will flash green twice. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a tailgate lock designed to prevent theft of the tailgate. • Insert ignition key and turn to the right to engage lock. • Turn ignition key to the left to unlock. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Note: If the red marking on the shaft is visible, the bed extender is not locked or properly secured. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
To remove or stow the cover: 1. Styleside only: In cold weather lower tailgate and release the levers on each side of the rear rail to release tension on the cover. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
5. Secure the cover behind the cab with two straps. The cover may be removed from the vehicle by sliding it sideways out of the front rail. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
For installation of the cover, follow the removal procedure in reverse order. Make sure the crossbows are locked in the notches in the side rails and the rear rails are locked in position prior to cover installation. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
To open the cover: • Unlock the cover (with the key) and lift the cover up for access to the pickup box. To close the cover: • Close the cover on pickup box. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If the door does not unlock when the U is pressed, see Interior power door disable feature in the Remote entry section in this chapter. Press U to unlock all doors and L to lock all doors. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)

Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and location of the release handle. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• 20 seconds elapse after all vehicle doors are closed and locked using the remote entry transmitter, the keyless entry pad, or the power door lock control (while the accompanying door is open). 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
1. Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the remote entry transmitter near the key ring. DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF THE REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four) available before beginning this procedure. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or • after 25 seconds of illumination. The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the OFF position for the illuminated entry system to operate. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
(one short and one long chirp) if autolock was activated. 7. Turn the ignition to OFF. The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If an incorrect code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash during this time. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
“no-start” condition. Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be purchased from your dealer. The dealer can program your spare keys to 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Note: The SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues.
2. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position. Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second, but no more than 10 seconds. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealer to have the new key(s) programmed. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure from step 1 for each additional key. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Adjust your head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible behind your head. The head restraints can be moved up and down. Push control to lower head restraint. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Pull the seatback handle up to move the seat back forward or backward. • Push down the release lever (if equipped) located on the back of the seat to quickly fold the seatback forward. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped) The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. Your vehicle will only be equipped with one of the two controls shown. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Press to raise or lower the front portion of the seat cushion. • Type A • Type B Press to raise or lower the rear portion of the seat cushion. • Type A • Type B 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
The rear seatback has a split 60/40 seat. Each seat cushion can be flipped up into the seatback position. 1. Pull control to release seat cushion. 2. Rotate seat cushion up until it locks into vertical storage position. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
1. Remove the head restraint. Push the release button at the base of the head restraint post and pull the head restraint up and out. 2. Pull control to release seat. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If not latched, the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop. 1. Pull control on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from the load floor position. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Depress the release button and remove the head restraint. Using the armrest (if equipped) Push the release control to move the armrest up or down. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. • Front seats • Rear seats (if equipped) 2. To unfasten, push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Children or Safety Seats for Children later in this chapter. How to use the automatic locking mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. • Front seats • Rear seats (if equipped) 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)

Do NOT place objects between the seats, this could interfere with the functioning of the pretensioner. For the SuperCab and 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. • Regular Cab/4–door SuperCrew 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
To ensure that you have used the correct buckle you should hear a snap and feel it latch. • 1st row center and 2nd row center (SuperCab) seating position The lap belt does not adjust automatically. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
5 minutes or until safety belt is buckled. The driver’s safety belt is The BeltMinder feature will not buckled while the safety belt activate. indicator light is illuminated and the safety belt warning chime is sounding. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
“Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are unbelted. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• The parking brake is set. • The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral position (manual transmission). • The ignition switch is in the OFF position. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off. • Once again, the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds. 9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)

(if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced.
OFF. This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating air bag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the air bag inflates is substantial. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. The front passenger air bag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center front seating position.
Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Refer to the Air bag readiness section in the Instrument cluster chapter or Passenger air bag on/off switch section in this chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is not required. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Failure to put the switch in a proper position can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a PASSENGER AIRBAG collision. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If the OFF light fails to illuminate when the passenger airbag ON/OFF switch is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the passenger airbag ON/OFF switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch, always remove the ignition key from the passenger air bag ON/OFF switch.
If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger air bag ON/OFF switch is in the ON position and the ignition switch is ON, have the passenger air bag ON/OFF switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. The passenger side air bag should always be ON (the air bag OFF light.
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning booster. 2003 F150 (f12)
(top of ear level) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Place seat back in upright position. • Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Cab and SuperCab) (passenger side front and rear seating positions-SuperCrew) (if equipped). Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether straps, refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps.
Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
(you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps two through nine. Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
7. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt. It will make a clicking noise while doing this. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor. • F150 Regular Cab 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Refer to the Folding Down The Rear Seats section in this chapter for information on how to operate the rear seats. 4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints • Front seat (Regular Cab and SuperCab only) • Rear seats ( with quad buckets only) 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
For example, the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child seats installed in the outboard rear seats. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
3. Install the child safety seat tightly using the safety belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter. 4. Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Your vehicle may be equipped with LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the following seating positions: • F150 Regular Cab • F150 Supercab • F150 SuperCrew 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
(if provided) on the seat back. Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments. Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. 2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission: 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park). If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission: 1. Make sure the parking brake is set. 2. Push the clutch pedal to the floor. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Driving • Turn the key to 4 (ON) without turning the key to 5 (START). 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
-23° C (-10° F) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle. The heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
ON. If the light does not illuminate during start up, remains on or flashes, the ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level (below the MIN mark on the reservoir). 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse). N (Neutral) With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• To return to (Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the (Overdrive) position. • Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
These actions will reduce the life of the clutch. Recommended shift speeds Upshift and downshift according to the following charts for your specific engine/drivetrain combination: 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
2 - 3 40 km/h (25 mph) 19 km/h (12 mph) 3 - 4 58 km/h (36 mph) 23 km/h (14 mph) 72 km/h (45 mph) 27 km/h (17 mph) (Overdrive) 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
2 - 3 26 km/h (16 mph) 10 km/h (6 mph) 3 - 4 43 km/h (27 mph) 16 km/h (10 mph) 68 km/h (42 mph) 26 km/h (16 mph) (Overdrive) 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake fully. Removing the key Turn the ignition off, push the release lever (located above the ignition), then turn the key toward you and remove the key. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
4H (4WD High) – Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads or in off-road situations. Not intended for use on dry pavement. N (Neutral) – No power to either front or rear wheels. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
This position should only be used when towing the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)

3. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, place the transmission in N (Neutral); on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, depress the clutch. 4. Move the 4WD control to the desired position. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement • If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your dealer or a qualified service technician. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Remember, you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Ford Motor Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If you nevertheless decide to equip your 4WD for off-road use with tires larger than what Ford Motor Company recommends, you should not use these tires for highway driving. If you use any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Ford Motor.
Failure to follow tire pressure recommendations can adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. Do not exceed the Ford Motor Company recommended pressure even if it is less than the maximum pressure allowed for the tire.
Driving Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box cover). Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Exceeding the maximum GCWR could result in extensive damage to your vehicle and personal injury. Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
5216 (11500) 3130 (6900)/ 2994 (6600) 5.4L 3.31 5443 (12000) 3311 (7300) 5.4L 3.55 5897 (13000) 3765 (8300)/ 3628 (8000) 5.4L 3.73 6124 (13500) 3900 (8600) 5.4L 4.10 6803 (15000) 3900 (8600) 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
3810 (8400) SuperCab/Super Crew 4x4 w/automatic transmission 4.6L 3.31/40.6 (16) 4763 (10500) 2540 (5600) 4.6L 3.55/40.6 (16) 5216 (11500) 2994 (6600)/ 2812 (6200) 4.6L 3.55/43.2 (17) 4990 (11000) 2767 (6100)/ 2585 (5700) 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Trailer frontal area considerations: • Not to exceed towing vehicle frontal area without Class III trailer towing package • Not to exceed 5.52 square meters (60 square feet) with Class III trailer towing package 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged. 2WD vehicles: • Place the transmission in N (Neutral) • Maximum speed is 56 km (35 mph) • Maximum distance is 80 km (50 miles) 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km (35 mph) must be exceeded, the drive shaft will have to be removed before the vehicle is towed. Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation. Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal transmission components.
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) The SRS is designed to activate in certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of injury.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies Roadside Emergencies GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: •.
Roadside Emergencies Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–665–2006. If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call 1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel cover. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Power mirror switch, Mirror turn signal relays Speed control module, Reverse lamp, Climate mode switch, Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) relay, Digital Transmission Range (DTR) sensor Cluster, Brake shift interlock solenoid, GEM 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Instrument illumination (dimmer switch power) — Not used Audio, GEM, PCM, Transmission range sensor DTR sensor, Clutch switch, Starter relay, I/P fuse 20 Air bag module, Passenger air bag deactivation module 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads. Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) 30A* Main light switch, Headlamp relay, Multifunction switch 20A* Console power point (Harley Davidson only) 20A* Trailer tow back-up/park lamps 15A* Main light switch, Park lamp relay 20A* Horn 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
10A* Trailer/Camper adapter (right stop/turn lamp) 10A* Trailer/Camper adapter (left stop/turn lamp) — Not used — Not used 15A* HEGO sensor, Automatic transmission — Not used 30A** Trailer tow battery charge 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
40A** Heated backlight – 30A** Heated seats — Trailer tow park lamp relay — Front wiper run/park relay — Trailer tow backup lamp relay — A/C clutch relay — Horn relay 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
112 km/h (70 mph) when the spare tire is in use. Though the spare tire is rated for 112 km/h (70 mph), always obey the local speed limits. The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may compromise the integrity of your tires. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Removing the spare tire 1. If equipped with a two piece lug wrench, assemble the lug wrench as shown in the illustration. • To assemble, screw the parts together. To disassemble, unscrew. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. Refer to the instruction sheet (located with the jack) for detailed tire change instructions. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
7. Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If the vehicle slips off the jack, someone could be seriously injured. • Front (4x2) • Front (4x4) 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. 10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 11. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. • Five lug nut wheel 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
(seven lug nut wheel): M12 x 1.75 * Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. Stowing the flat/spare tire Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in failure of cable or loss of spare tire.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the assisting battery. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Jump starting 1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface. Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. 2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the booster vehicle’s battery. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Ford recommends your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
Ford Customer Relationship Center. Away from home If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help you.
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.). In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of Canada dealers. If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
Customer Assistance The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without incurring obligations per applicable state law.
• The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle. • A brief description of your unresolved concern. • A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor Company. • The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the dealership(s).
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to them under state or federal law.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call: FORD MOTOR COMPANY.
Obtaining a French owner’s guide French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C.
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. • Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Cleaning • 4.2L V6 engine • 4.6L V8 and 5.4L V8 engine 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts. • Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather. • Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Hot waxes applied by commercial car washes can affect the cleanability of vinyl material. • Using high water pressure or wand-type car washes against the vinyl cover and tonneau frame rails may cause water leaks and possible seal damage. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Cleaning FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle.
• Manual transmission: 1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1 (First). 2. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 3. Block the wheels. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located under the front center of the hood. 3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
5. Brake fluid reservoir 6. Power distribution box 7. Engine coolant reservoir 8. Air filter assembly 9. Power steering fluid reservoir 10. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission) 11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
4. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Power distribution box 6. Air filter assembly 7. Engine coolant reservoir 8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 9. Battery 10. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission) 11. Engine oil filler cap 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
4. Power distribution box 5. Engine coolant reservoir 6. Air filter assembly 7. Intercooler coolant reservoir 8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 9. Battery 10. Transmission fluid dipstick 11. Engine oil filler cap 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission). 4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications • 4.2L engine 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL. • If the oil level is below the MIN mark, add enough oil to raise the level within the MIN-MAX range. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American Petroleum Institute (API). To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an equivalent 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153–H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up engine noises or knock may be experienced.

6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process. • The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 miles) or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F). • Boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F). • Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion. • Enables calibrated gauges to work properly. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)

Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. • Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored), VC-7–A (VC-7–B in Oregon), meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51–A1. Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, may darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to golden tan.
Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred. The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load and terrain. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool. 4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low. Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling. • DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty. Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter. Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to improve air quality. Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse affect on powertrain components.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy: Calculation 1: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers traveled. Calculation 2: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size. • Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy. • Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
• Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with at least four idle periods. Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid level to the step in the reservoir. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Ford specification ESA-M6C25–A. Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal, start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature. The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating temperature (66°C-77°C [150°F-170°F]). COLD DO NOT ADD 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
5. Install and tighten the fill plug securely. Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt)
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require lubrication.
This could cause filter damage and allow unmetered air to enter the engine if not properly seated. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. Treadwear.
Tire Information label located on the inside of the fuel filler door. Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
(side to side). • Four tire rotation • Five tire rotation 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type, speed rating, load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g. “All Terrain”, “Touring”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford. Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires or larger size tires.
If a spark plug needs to be replaced, use only spark plugs with the service number suffix letter as shown above. Use only AGSF-12FM1 spark plugs for replacement. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Oil (Canada) Fuel tank 4x4 Reg. Cab 92.7L (24.5 gallons) with short wheelbase 4x2 Regular 94.6L (25.0 gallons) Cab, SuperCab and SuperCrew with short wheelbase All long 113.6L (30.0 gallons) Wheelbase 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transfer case to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A, for complete fill of 8.8 inch and 9.75 inch Traction-Lok axles. Service refill capacity is determined by filling the axle to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.
M97B51-A1 Engine Coolant (yellow-colored) Motorcraft SAE XO-5W20-QSP WSS-M2C153-H 5W-20 Premium (US) and API Synthetic Blend CXO-5W20–LSP12 Certification Motor Oil (Canada) Mark Engine oil Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil (Canada) 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)

(4R70W) Motorcraft ZC-32–A WSB-M8B16–A2 Premium Windshield Windshield washer fluid Washer Concentrate Add 118 ml (4 oz) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications Traction-Lok axles. Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of 10.25 and 10.5 inch Traction-Lok axles. Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle.
(65.4 in) (65.4 in) (65.4 in) front/rear 1661 mm 1661 mm 1661 mm 1661 mm (65.4 in) (65.4 in) (65.4 in) (65.4 in) Vehicle width, including mirrors: 2279 mm (89.7 in) 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
(138.5 in) (138.8 in) (5) Track 1661 mm 1661 mm 1661 mm 1661 mm front/rear (65.4 in) (65.4 in) (65.4 in) (65.4 in) Vehicle width, including mirrors: 2279 mm (89.7 in) 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
(73.9) (76.9) 3518 3525 (4) Wheel base (138.5) (138.8) 1661 1 661 (5)Track front/rear (65.4) (65.4) Vehicle width, including mirrors: 2293 mm (90.3 in) Harley-Davidson height is 1852 mm (72.9 in) 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Certification label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Certification label may be located. The Certification label is located on the front door latch pillar on the driver’s side. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
This information is added to the plate at the time of vehicle build. Since plate is custom made, it is not a serviceable part. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
In addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or.
Running boards (molded, diamond plate, tubular and stirrup step) Seatback organizer Speed control Towing mirrors Trailer hitch (Class III) Trailer hitch bars and balls Trailer hitch wiring adaptor Trailer swivel hitch 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Molded “all weather” vinyl floor mats Side window air deflectors Tailgate covers, diamond plate Tonneau covers (hard, color keyed — Leer supplier branded) Tonneau covers (soft) Truck cover Universal floor mats Wheels 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
(Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’s operation.) • Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage that may result from the use of such equipment. 2003 F150 (f12)
Auxiliary power point. 58 Child safety seats. 123 Axle attaching with tether straps. 128 lubricant specifications. 259, 261 in front seat. 124 refill capacities. 256 in rear seat. 124, 127 traction lok. 143 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
259, 261 jump-starting. 193 Cruise control Emergency Flashers. 177 (see Speed control). 63 Emission control system. 240 Customer Assistance. 176 Ford accessories for your Engine. 261–262 vehicle. 215 cleaning. 209 Ford Extended Service coolant. 227 Plan. 201 fail-safe coolant. 231 Getting assistance outside idle speed control. 225.
237, 255 flash to pass. 45 fuel pump shut-off switch. 177 high beam. 45 improving fuel economy. 237 replacing bulbs. 49 octane rating. 236, 261–262 turning on and off. 44 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
Moon roof. 65 Motorcraft parts. 237, 255 Lamps autolamp system. 44 bulb replacement specifications chart. 48 Octane rating. 236 cargo lamps. 46 daytime running light. 45 Oil (see Engine oil). 221 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
55 Stereo Safety Belt Maintenance. 110 Single CD. 22 Safety belts (see Safety restraints). 98–103 Safety defects, reporting. 207 Tailgate. 71–72 Safety restraints. 98–103 belt minder. 106 Tilt steering wheel. 55 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)
(automatic). 245 fluid, checking and adding Windshield washer fluid and (manual). 248 wipers. 54 fluid, refill capacities. 256 checking and adding fluid. 221 lubricant specifications. 259, 261 replacing wiper blades. 54 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus)

This manual also for:

FREE Ford OWNER'S MANUAL PDF, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Free Aerostar Owner's Manual
Free Aspire Owner's Manual
Free Bronco Owner's Manual
Free C Max Energi Owner's Manual
Free C Max Hybrid Owner's Manual
Free Contour Owner's Manual
Free Contour Svt Owner's Manual
Free Crown Victoria Owner's Manual
Free E 150 Owner's Manual
Free E 250 Owner's Manual
Free E 350 Owner's Manual
Free E Series Van Owner's Manual
Free E Series Wagon Owner's Manual
Free Econoline Cargo Owner's Manual
Free Econoline Wagon Owner's Manual
Free Edge Owner's Manual
Free Escape Owner's Manual
Free Escape Hybrid Owner's Manual
Free Escort Owner's Manual
Free Excursion Owner's Manual
Free Expedition Owner's Manual
Free Expedition El Owner's Manual
Free Explorer Owner's Manual
Free Explorer Sport Owner's Manual
Free Explorer Sport Trac Owner's Manual
Free F 150 Owner's Manual
Free F 150 Heritage Owner's Manual
Free F 150 Svt Lightning Owner's Manual
Free F 250 Owner's Manual
Free F 250 Super Duty Owner's Manual
Free F 350 Owner's Manual
Free F 350 Super Duty Owner's Manual
Free F 450 Super Duty Owner's Manual
Free Festiva Owner's Manual
Free Fiesta Owner's Manual
Free Five Hundred Owner's Manual
Free Flex Owner's Manual
Free Focus Owner's Manual
Free Focus Rs Owner's Manual
Free Focus St Owner's Manual
Free Freestar Owner's Manual
Free Freestyle Owner's Manual
Free Fusion Owner's Manual
Free Fusion Energi Owner's Manual
Free Fusion Hybrid Owner's Manual
Free Gt Owner's Manual
Free Ltd Crown Victoria Owner's Manual
Free Mustang Owner's Manual
Free Mustang Svt Cobra Owner's Manual
Free Probe Owner's Manual
Free Ranger Owner's Manual
Free Shelby Gt350 Owner's Manual
Free Shelby Gt500 Owner's Manual
Free Taurus Owner's Manual
Free Taurus X Owner's Manual
Free Tempo Owner's Manual
Free Thunderbird Owner's Manual
Free Transit Connect Owner's Manual
Free Transit Van Owner's Manual
Free Transit Wagon Owner's Manual
Free Windstar Owner's Manual
Free Windstar Cargo Owner's Manual

Free Aerostar Owner's Manual
Free Aspire Owner's Manual
Free Bronco Owner's Manual
Free C Max Energi Owner's Manual
Free C Max Hybrid Owner's Manual
Free Contour Owner's Manual
Free Contour Svt Owner's Manual
Free Crown Victoria Owner's Manual
Free E 150 Owner's Manual
Free E 250 Owner's Manual
Free E 350 Owner's Manual
Free E Series Van Owner's Manual
Free E Series Wagon Owner's Manual
Free Econoline Cargo Owner's Manual
Free Econoline Wagon Owner's Manual
Free Edge Owner's Manual
Free Escape Owner's Manual
Free Escape Hybrid Owner's Manual
Free Escort Owner's Manual
Free Excursion Owner's Manual
Free Expedition Owner's Manual
Free Expedition El Owner's Manual
Free Explorer Owner's Manual
Free Explorer Sport Owner's Manual
Free Explorer Sport Trac Owner's Manual
Free F 150 Owner's Manual
Free F 150 Heritage Owner's Manual
Free F 150 Svt Lightning Owner's Manual
Free F 250 Owner's Manual
Free F 250 Super Duty Owner's Manual
Free F 350 Owner's Manual
Free F 350 Super Duty Owner's Manual
Free F 450 Super Duty Owner's Manual
Free Festiva Owner's Manual
Free Fiesta Owner's Manual
Free Five Hundred Owner's Manual
Free Flex Owner's Manual
Free Focus Owner's Manual
Free Focus Rs Owner's Manual
Free Focus St Owner's Manual
Free Freestar Owner's Manual
Free Freestyle Owner's Manual
Free Fusion Owner's Manual
Free Fusion Energi Owner's Manual
Free Fusion Hybrid Owner's Manual
Free Gt Owner's Manual
Free Ltd Crown Victoria Owner's Manual
Free Mustang Owner's Manual
Free Mustang Svt Cobra Owner's Manual
Free Probe Owner's Manual
Free Ranger Owner's Manual
Free Shelby Gt350 Owner's Manual
Free Shelby Gt500 Owner's Manual
Free Taurus Owner's Manual
Free Taurus X Owner's Manual
Free Tempo Owner's Manual
Free Thunderbird Owner's Manual
Free Transit Connect Owner's Manual
Free Transit Van Owner's Manual
Free Transit Wagon Owner's Manual
Free Windstar Owner's Manual
Free Windstar Cargo Owner's Manual

Free Aerostar Owner's Manual
Free Aspire Owner's Manual
Free Bronco Owner's Manual
Free C Max Energi Owner's Manual
Free C Max Hybrid Owner's Manual
Free Contour Owner's Manual
Free Contour Svt Owner's Manual
Free Crown Victoria Owner's Manual
Free E 150 Owner's Manual
Free E 250 Owner's Manual
Free E 350 Owner's Manual
Free E Series Van Owner's Manual
Free E Series Wagon Owner's Manual
Free Econoline Cargo Owner's Manual
Free Econoline Wagon Owner's Manual
Free Edge Owner's Manual
Free Escape Owner's Manual
Free Escape Hybrid Owner's Manual
Free Escort Owner's Manual
Free Excursion Owner's Manual
Free Expedition Owner's Manual
Free Expedition El Owner's Manual
Free Explorer Owner's Manual
Free Explorer Sport Owner's Manual
Free Explorer Sport Trac Owner's Manual
Free F 150 Owner's Manual
Free F 150 Heritage Owner's Manual
Free F 150 Svt Lightning Owner's Manual
Free F 250 Owner's Manual
Free F 250 Super Duty Owner's Manual
Free F 350 Owner's Manual
Free F 350 Super Duty Owner's Manual
Free F 450 Super Duty Owner's Manual
Free Festiva Owner's Manual
Free Fiesta Owner's Manual
Free Five Hundred Owner's Manual
Free Flex Owner's Manual
Free Focus Owner's Manual
Free Focus Rs Owner's Manual
Free Focus St Owner's Manual
Free Freestar Owner's Manual
Free Freestyle Owner's Manual
Free Fusion Owner's Manual
Free Fusion Energi Owner's Manual
Free Fusion Hybrid Owner's Manual
Free Gt Owner's Manual
Free Ltd Crown Victoria Owner's Manual
Free Mustang Owner's Manual
Free Mustang Svt Cobra Owner's Manual
Free Probe Owner's Manual
Free Ranger Owner's Manual
Free Shelby Gt350 Owner's Manual
Free Shelby Gt500 Owner's Manual
Free Taurus Owner's Manual
Free Taurus X Owner's Manual
Free Tempo Owner's Manual
Free Thunderbird Owner's Manual
Free Transit Connect Owner's Manual
Free Transit Van Owner's Manual
Free Transit Wagon Owner's Manual
Free Windstar Owner's Manual
Free Windstar Cargo Owner's Manual

Ford OWNER'S
MANUAL

Leading
Competitor

www.bigotires.comVehicleHistory.com provides you access to information from public databases. We do not enter the information into the databases ourselves. We cannot verify the accuracy of any information in our database, which is subject to clerical errors made by government employees beyond our control. We cannot guarantee that any vehicle history report is complete. We are dependent on outside agencies for our data, which you agree to access at your own risk. For more information, check out our terms of service. All images and content on our site is subject to copyright.

Who wants the 97-03 Factory Repair Manual?, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Up front I will apologize for the long winded explanation.
To those of you that had a problem with all of the files not extracted, there is a way to get them from the original *.zip file.
First thing you need to do is change the file view settings in folder options so that file extensions are visible. You can change it back later.
Starting with the original Ford_F150_1997-2003_1231.zip file, navigate to the document that did not extract, I will use the Remove-Install-Overhaul.pdf file as an example.
Ford_F150_1997-2003_1231.zip/FORD F150 2001 1997-2003 SERVICE REPAIR MANUAL/2001-2003/2003 Repair Information/Engine Performance/Remove-Install-Overhaul.pdf
Open the file. Once the file is open in Acrobat Reader, click save. There may be a dialog box that states that you cannot make changes to a Reader file and that you will only be saving a copy, click "OK". Select the destination of the file to be saved (I chose the same folder in the directory that I saved the manual to), click save.
Navigate to the location you saved the file and it may still show up as non-pdf file with the extension *.pd (About half of them did), right click the file and select "Rename". Change the file extension from .pd to .pdf and hit the "Enter" button. The file will now be a valid PDF file that can now be viewed.
After I typed this, I discovered that some of the files just need to be renamed and add the extension .pdf at the end and all is good. In this case, you definitely need to set your folder settings to make file extensions visible or you may wind up with files that have .pdf.pdf which will definitely break them.
The most likely reason this happens is that there is a character limit (It looks to be 25 characters) to a file name with the algorithm that the extractor uses, thus cutting off a portion of the files name and the extension which leads to a file type unrecognizable by the computer.
Try both methods and determine which one works in your case.
Wow! This is a first. What a gift lol.
Yea, large download, took 5 minutes or so. Then I went thru it real quick. Well, I should mention I have all service DVD's 96- 2006, and I'm somewhat familiar with things. Wasn't going to download at first, -glad I did!
This download is definitely Ford Service and accurate. - It's a little different being quite a bit more user friendly. VERY easy getting to where you want to go lol. From what I can see, the tech data and trouble shooting per service scanner has been weeded out. Well, most of it. That's good as we can't use that info anyway.
Other differences, all good from I can see so far.
Just get it while you can. I know I'm going to use it, - as the first go to lol.

Thanks a ton RoscoeT, excellent contribution, -the best!
I'm such a dumb @$$�I've been skipping over this thread for three days now thinking it was just the glove box owners manual
Downloaded in about 4 minutes with zero errors on my iMac. Everything opens and displays great. Thanks a million dude!
I have the service DVD also, but then I remembered I have to break out an old laptop and fudge the date back a year or two to get it to open.
Thanks Roscoe, what an awesome day on the site.
And what you said about contributing, many of the fellows are just learning and will get beat up if they speak. Forums are the real world and if you say something stupid you have to live with it. forever. Kind of like when a chick lets a dude take her picture..
But thanks for your contribution and I promise I will contribute what little I can. I am an electrical engineer and a 70s/80s race gear head. Things are different now and I am just getting back into working on my own cars because of the recession (things are getting better, but I still cannot afford a new truck or dealer repair prices). This site and contributions like yours are awesome and what make having the internet worth the $40 a month.

2001 F150 Fuse Box Diagram, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Originally Posted by mewesguitars
I just bought a 99 F150 and the horn doesn't work. Also the interior lights do not work with the doors open or on the dash switch. I don't have a manual and need the details on the fuse panel. If anyone has this info I would appreciate your help.
I want to change the fuse out to see if that is the problem before I do anything else. However not sure which fuse is the a/c. I have the diagram, but don't see any reference. The fuse box and temp blend door were replaced last year. Any suggestions.
Originally Posted by Bluegrass 7
73,707 views on this thread has to be a record of some sort for looing at fuse assignments.
Look on the under side of the cover.
GOOD LUCK.
Ford stopped imprinting fuse locations and assignments on box covers before 1998, and if you do not have the owner's manual, you have to buy a shop manual or find it on the internet.
The fuse numbers are on the under side of the engine bay fuse box cover.
The cover is removable so you can see them better.
You do have to know what number fuse your after per the owner manual.
Not every truck 'build' has the same fuse assignments.
Good luck.

Ford Car manuals, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Ford is one of the most popular auto makers in the world. The American giant is headquartered in Michigan and was founded in 1903 by Henry Ford. The company sells a large range of vehicles, including commercial and luxury cars. Ford is currently the second-largest U.S.-based automaker and the fifth largest in the world. In 2008 alone, Ford produced more than 5.5 million automobiles and employed more than 200,000 employees at 90 plants worldwide.
Some of the most popular models include the F-250, Escort, Focus, Taurus and the legendary Mustang. Written by experts with hands-on experience, our extensive selection of Ford repair manuals will help you to fully service your vehicle, as well as rebuild from the ground up. Haynes manuals provide you with all the practical tips, photos, and step-by-step explanations you need to get the job done.

Popular Ford Car manuals

List Price $29.95

List Price $29.95

List Price $29.95

List Price $29.95

List Price $29.99
Sale Price $19.99

List Price $29.99
Sale Price $19.99

List Price $29.95

List Price $29.95

List Price $29.95
Join our mailing list

Company

Using our site

Contact us

Connect with us

Find retailer

Other Haynes sites

Additional Disclosures

Images shown are for reference purposes only. US images may be shown on this website. Images may not necessarily represent the configurable options selected or available on the vehicle or the models shown. Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited is not responsible for typographical or other errors, including data transmission, display, or software errors, that may appear on the site.
Vehicle offers: Dealers may sell or lease for less. Offers may be cancelled at any time without notice. See your Ford Dealer for complete offer details or call the Ford Customer Relationship Centre at 1-800-565-3673. For factory orders, a customer may either take advantage of raincheckable eligible Ford retail customer promotional incentives/offers available at the time of vehicle factory order or time of vehicle delivery, but not both or combinations thereof.
Service offers: Offers may be cancelled or changed at any time without notice.See Service Advisor for complete details. Applicable taxes and provincial levies not included. Dealer may sell for less.Only available at participating locations.
SYNC Connect is an optional feature on select 2017 MY vehicles and includes SYNC Connect service, for 5 years from the vehicle sale date as recorded by the dealer, through use of FordPass on select smartphones. Subscription fees apply after 5 years. FordPass is available to download via the App Store® or Google Play™, late availability, Spring 2016. Message and data rates may apply. Service may be limited by mobile phone network coverage area. FordPass Terms and Privacy Policy apply.
1 Based on MSRP (Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price) after currently applicable adjustments have been applied. Excludes options, freight (except in Quebec), AC Tax (except in Quebec), Green Levy (if applicable, and except in Quebec), license, fuel fill charge, insurance, dealer PDI (except in Quebec), PPSA (if financed or leased) (a maximum RDPRM fee of $44 and third party service fee of $4 for Quebec, if leased), administration fees (except in Quebec), and taxes. Dealers may sell or lease for less. See your local dealer for details.
2 Fuel consumption ratings based on Government of Canada approved test methods. Actual fuel consumption will vary. Refer to "Specs" portion of applicable vehicle page for engine and transmission details.
3 The Bluetooth word mark is a trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. All rights reserved.
4 You must have a Bluetooth ® -enabled phone paired to your SYNC system. The Bluetooth word mark is a trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
5 The vehicle's electrical system (including the Battery), the wireless service provider's signal and a connected mobile phone all must be available and operating for 911 Assist to function properly. These systems may become damaged in a crash. The paired mobile phone must be connected to Sync and the 911 Assist feature enabled in order for 911 to be dialed. Mobile phone charges may apply.
6 Some mobile phones and some digital media players may not be fully compatible. Don’t drive while distracted. Use voice-operated systems when possible; don’t use handheld devices while driving. SYNC with MyFord Touch voice recognition and screens available in English, French and Spanish. Some features may be locked out while the vehicle is in motion.
7 Some driver input required. Requires having available Intelligent Access key on your person.
8 Always wear your safety belt and secure children in the rear seat.
9 Some driver input required. Driver-assist features are supplemental and do not replace the driver's attention, judgment and need to control the vehicle.
10 Driver-assist features are supplemental and do not replace the driver's attention, judgment and need to control the vehicle.
11 Figures achieved with 93-octane premium fuel.
12 Do not drive while distracted.
13 SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscriptions sold after 6-month prepaid period expires. Subscriptions are governed by SiriusXM Customer Agreement; see sirius.ca.
14 Sony is a registered trademark of Sony Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved.
15 Always wear your safety belt and secure children in the rear seat. SOS hardware may become damaged or the battery may lose power in a crash, which could prevent operation. Not all crashes will activate an airbag or safety belt pretensioner.
16 Some driver input required. Requires having available Intelligent Access key on your person. Not available with Class II Trailer
17 Equipped with the Class II Trailer Tow Package.
18 MyFord Mobile subscription complimentary for five years from vehicle sale date as recorded by the dealer. Subscription fees apply after five years. MyFord Mobile requires a compatible 2.5G independent cellular network. Evolving technology and cellular networks may affect future functionality. AeroVironment™ is a trademark of AeroVironment, Inc.
19 Remember that even advanced technology cannot overcome the laws of physics. It's always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
20 When properly equipped.
21 Located between the grille opening and the radiator, the active grille shutter automatically opens and closes to maintain the ideal engine operating temperature and helps improve fuel efficiency by maximizing the aerodynamic efficiency of the grille opening and the engine cooling system.
22 MSRP is the Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price only and excludes options, freight, AC Tax, Green Levy (if applicable), license, fuel fill charge, insurance, dealer PDI, PPSA (if financed or leased) (a maximum RDPRM fee of $44 and third party service fee of $4 for Quebec, if leased), administration fees, and taxes. Dealers may sell or lease for less. See your local dealer for details.
23 Down Payment - The amount of money you are able to pay towards the purchase or lease a vehicle which results in a lower amount to be financed or leased. If you want to include a trade-in amount, please add it to the trade-in field
24 Trade-in-Value - The estimated amount you can expect to receive from a dealer for a trade-in vehicle. Trade-in value subject to dealer evaluation of your vehicle.
25 Term by months - A Lease term is the number of scheduled months in your lease agreement. If you finance the purchase of your vehicle, the term represents the number of months you agree to pay off the contract with your scheduled payments.
26 APR - Must finance through Ford Credit Canada Limited. Subject to Ford Credit Canada Limited lending criteria. Not all buyers will qualify for the lowest APR. Only available on approved credit. This is a sample transaction for estimation purposes only. Contact your local dealer for full program details. Some restrictions/conditions may apply.
27 Your entered rate - A rate you enter manually to estimate a payment. This rate is for estimation purposes only. You may not be able to finance your vehicle at this rate.
28 Lessee is responsible for charges applicable on excess distance travelled over the “Annual KMs” stated.
29 Delivery Allowances are not combinable with any fleet consumer incentives.
31 Based on MSRP (Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price) and includes freight, AC Tax, Green Levy (if applicable), currently applicable adjustments and incentives, options and accessories (where selected), but excludes license, fuel fill charge, insurance, dealer PDI (except in Quebec), PPSA (if financed or leased) (a maximum RDPRM fee of $44 and third party service fee of $4 for Quebec, if leased), and administration fees (except in Quebec). Dealers may sell or lease for less. See your local dealer for details.
32 Offer samples shown may not be available to all customers and may be subject to restrictions on combinability with other currently available incentives. Offers listed are available at the time of posting and are subject to change, cancellation and expiration. Restrictions apply. See your local dealer for complete details.
33 Based on MSRP (Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price) and includes freight, AC Tax, Green Levy (if applicable), currently applicable adjustments and incentives, options and accessories (where selected), down payment and/or trade-in value where input by user, and applicable government sales taxes when selected by user (except when using tool with lease path selected) but excludes, license, fuel fill charge, insurance, dealer PDI (except in Quebec), PPSA (if financed or leased) (a maximum RDPRM fee of $44 and third party service fee of $4 for Quebec, if leased), and administration fees (except in Quebec). Dealers may sell or lease for less. See your local dealer for details.
34 Based on MSRP (Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price) and includes freight, AC Tax, Green Levy (if applicable), applicable government sales taxes, currently applicable adjustments and incentives, trade-in value and down payment (where entered), and options (where selected) but excludes accessories, license, fuel fill charge, insurance, dealer PDI (except in Quebec), PPSA (if financed or leased) (a maximum RDPRM fee of $44 and third party service fee of $4 for Quebec, if leased), and administration fees (except in Quebec). Dealers may sell or lease for less. See your local dealer for details.
35 Estimated payment: Finance - The Payment shown is an estimate of the principal and interest you can expect to pay monthly (or bi-weekly) on a Ford Credit retail installment contract, and includes an estimate of the delivery and destination charges. Payments do not include registration fees, and other applicable dealer fees. Bi-weekly payment amounts are calculated by taking the sum of twelve (12) monthly payments and dividing by 26 periods. Please consult with your local dealership for actual vehicle payment information.
36 Estimated payment: Lease - The Payment shown is an estimate of the monthly (or bi-weekly) amount you can expect to pay on a Ford Credit lease contract. Payments do not include PPSA, registration, security deposit, NSF fees (where applicable), excess wear and tear, late fees, dealer fees and certain taxes and other charges. Bi-weekly payment amounts are calculated by taking the sum of twelve (12) monthly payments and dividing by 26 periods. Please consult with your local dealership for actual vehicle payment information. Annual kilometrage restrictions apply. Excess kilometrage charges are 12¢per km for Fiesta, Focus, C-Max, Fusion and Escape; 16¢per km for E-Series, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Flex, Explorer, F-Series, MKS, MKX, MKZ, MKT, MKC, Transit and Transit Connect; 20¢per km for Expedition and Navigator, plus applicable taxes. Excess kilometrage charges subject to change, see your local dealer for details.
37 Electric Vehicle Incentive (the “Incentive”) is provided by the provincial governments of British Columbia, Ontario and Quebec (each a “Participating Province”). The Incentive is subject to cancellation or change by any Participating Province without notice. Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited is not responsible for any changes to or cancellation of the Incentive and makes no representations about eligibility. For more information about the Incentive, please consult your provincial government or Ford dealer. Rebate amount varies by eligible vehicle and payment option. The Incentive is applied after applicable taxes are calculated for Ontario and Quebec; the Incentive is applied before applicable taxes are calculated for British Columbia. Certain conditions apply.
38 The Option Package price is a manufacturer's suggested price. The monthly payment displayed is an example only, based on the borrowing details selected in the vehicle payment calculator. Prices and monthly payments may vary. Options and Options Packages are subject to availability. Dealer may sell for less. See your local dealer for details.
39 This payment estimator is a tool to help you estimate your scheduled payments and does not make any representation as to actual payment amounts. The payments calculated using this tool are estimates only. The estimated selling price and the interest rate that you enter to use this payment estimator tool are for your estimation/comparison purposes only. The actual prices and payments may vary and dealers may sell for less. Additional payments may be required under the terms of any finance or lease agreement that you may enter into and in the case of a lease, you may be required to pay excess kilometre and wear and tear charges. You must qualify for credit to finance or lease a vehicle subject to Ford Credit Canada Limited lending criteria and you may not be able to finance/lease a vehicle at the rate you have chosen. Please contact your local Dealer for information regarding price, payments and rates.
42 See lease offer legal marked with “65” symbol for monthly payment lease offer details. Comparison payments are for reference purposes only and are calculated as follows: the monthly payment is annualized (multiplied by 12) and then divided by the comparison period (26 for bi-weekly, 52 for weekly and 365 for daily). For example ($299 X 12) / 26 bi-weekly period = $138, /52 weeks = $69, /365 days = $9.83.
43 Offer only valid from July 1, 2016 to September 30, 2016 (the "Offer Period") to resident Canadians with an eligible Costco membership on or before June 30, 2016. Receive $1,000 towards the purchase or lease of a new and available 2016/2017 Ford model (excluding Fiesta, Focus, C-MAX, 50th Anniversary Edition Mustang, Shelby ® GT350 Mustang, Shelby ® GT350R Mustang, F-150 Regular Cab XL 4x2. F-150 Raptor, Medium Truck, and all 2015 final settled models) (each an “Eligible Vehicle”). Limit one (1) offer per each Eligible Vehicle purchase or lease, up to a maximum of two (2) separate Eligible Vehicle sales per Costco Membership Number. Offer is transferable to persons domiciled with an eligible Costco member. Applicable taxes calculated before CAD$1,000 offer is deducted. ® Registered trademark of Price Costco International, Inc. used under license.
44 2015 Focus SE Sedan and Hatch: $18,849 MSRP. MSRP is the Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price only and excludes options, freight, AC Tax, license, fuel fill charge, insurance, dealer PDI, PPSA (if financed or leased) (a maximum RDPRM fee of $44 and third party service fee of $4 for Quebec, if leased), administration fees, and taxes. Dealers may sell or lease for less. See your local dealer for details.

2015 Fiesta S Sedan and Hatch: $14,999 MSRP. MSRP is the Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price only and excludes options, freight, AC Tax, license, fuel fill charge, insurance, dealer PDI, PPSA (if financed or leased) (a maximum RDPRM fee of $44 and third party service fee of $4 for Quebec, if leased), administration fees, and taxes. Dealers may sell or lease for less. See your local dealer for details.

47 Ford Protection Plan (“FPP”) is only available for purchasers of Ford or Motorcraft® replacement parts for non-commercial cars and light trucks. FPP provides coverage (part only, labour and towing excluded) beyond the expiry of the standard Parts & Accessory Warranty. If a FPP-eligible Ford or Motorcraft® part fails due to a defect in material or workmanship, wear out or rust through, it will be replaced at no charge as long as the original purchaser of the part owns the vehicle on which the part was installed. Coverage varies between over-the-counter and dealer-installed parts. See your local Ford Store for complete coverage details and limitations.

48 Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® replacement brake pads and shoes are tested to ensure braking performance meets or exceeds the requirements in Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS) 105-Hydraulic and Electric Brake System, and 135-Light Vehicle Brake Systems, as applicable.

49 In order to receive a local competitor’s advertised price: (i) tires must be purchased and installed at your participating Ford Dealer; (ii) customer must present the competitor’s actual, local advertisement (containing the lower price) which must have been printed within 30 days of the sale; and (iii) the tires being purchased must be the same brand, and have the same sidewall, speed and load ratings as shown in the competitive advertisement. Offer only available at participating Ford dealerships. This offer is valid on the cost of the tire only and does not include labour costs, valve stems, mounting, balancing, disposal, and taxes. Offer does not apply to quotes or advertised prices outside of Canada, in eBay advertisements, by tire wholesalers and online tire retailers, or closeout, special order, discontinued, and clearance/liquidation offers. Offer may be cancelled or changed at any time without prior notice. See your Service Advisor for details. Only available at participating locations.

50 Rebate offers are manufacturer’s mail-in or online rebates. Rebates available on select Hankook, Continental/General (credit card gift card), Goodyear, Pirelli, Yokohama, Bridgestone (credit card gift card), Firestone (credit card gift card), Michelin/BFGoodrich/Uniroyal and Toyo. Offers are valid on qualifying sets of four tires, purchased and installed at participating locations during the respective promotion periods for each tire brand. Offers are valid on the cost of the tire(s) only and do not include labour costs, valve stems, mounting, balancing, disposal, and taxes. Amount of rebates (ranging from $35 to $100), start dates and expiration dates (ranging from March 1, 2016 to May 31, 2016) vary depending on tire manufacturer. It is the responsibility of the customer to submit the required claim forms and proof of purchase to the relevant tire manufacturer with sufficient postage by the required deadline for that rebate offer. See your Service Advisor for complete details and claim forms.

51 Class is Full-Size Pickups under 8,500 lbs. GVWR

52 Applies to single rear wheel vehicles only. Diesel models not eligible.

53 Up to 5 litres of oil. Disposal fees may be extra. Does not apply to diesel engines.

54 Manufacturer's Suggested Retail Price (MSRP). Dealer may sell for less.

55 Excludes emergency brake pads or shoes. Machining or replacement of rotors and drums available at additional cost.

56 Winter safety package includes: four (4) winter tires, four (4) tire pressure monitoring sensors, and choice of four (4) steel or aluminum wheels. Some conditions apply. See Dealer for details. Vehicle handling characteristics, tire load index and speed rating may not be the same as factory supplied all-season tires. Winter tires are meant to be operated during winter conditions and may require a higher cold inflation pressure than all-season tires. Consult your Ford of Canada Dealer for details including applicable warranty coverage

57 Storage term is at the Dealer's sole discretion, up to a maximum of one year.

58 Offer applies to single rear wheel vehicles. Taxes and disposal fees extra. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) excluded. Dual rear wheel models qualify at additional cost. Up to 16 litres of oil.

59 Improved fuel efficiency depends on model, year and condition of vehicle.

60 6000-series aluminum alloy. Lighter EPA curb weight, versus predecessor model.

61 Up to 700 pounds lighter, EPA curb weight, versus predecessor model.

62 Offer only valid from February 3, 2015 to January 3, 2017 (the “Program Period”) to Ford Credit Canada Limited (FCCL) purchase finance and lease customers. Canadian resident customers who (a) are approved by Ford Credit; (b) have no previous automotive financing history; (c) do not have any derogatory credit; (d) have verified full-time employment (minimum of 6 months); (e) have verified income sufficient to meet ordinary living expenses; (f) have verified maximum vehicle payment-to-income (including add-ons) of 15%; (g) have verified maximum total debt-to-income of 50% (debt calculation including rent); (h) have a verified driver's license; and (i) have purchased all required insurance to operate the vehicle prior to delivery (each a “First Time Buyer”) can receive an incentive equalling the eligible customer's vehicle down payment (up to a maximum of $500) (the “Incentive”) towards the purchase finance or lease or factory-order (during the Program Period) of a new 2015/2016/2017 (as applicable based on availability) Ford Focus or Fiesta (each an “Eligible Vehicle”). Limit one (1) Incentive per First Time Buyer. Eligible Vehicle must be purchase financed or leased and registered in the name of the First Time Buyer. Taxes payable before Incentive is deducted. Not combinable with any CPA/GPC or Daily Rental incentives, the Commercial Upfit Program or the Commercial Fleet Incentive Program (CFIP) or any other Targeted Offer Program including the Graduate Rebate program. See dealer for details.

63 Offer only valid from February 3, 2015 to January 3, 2017 (the “Program Period”) to Canadian resident customers who (a) have graduated, or will graduate (within the next 4 months) from an accredited university undergraduate degree program, or from a two-year (48 weeks minimum) college program, or from a three-year CEGEP D.E.C. program in Quebec; (b) have graduated, or will graduate (within the next 4 months) from a recognized military or police academy; or (c) are a full-time post-graduate student (Masters, Doctorate/PhD) (each an “Eligible Grad”). Eligible Grads will receive $500 (the “Incentive”) towards the purchase, lease, or factory order (during the Program Period) of a new 2015/2016/2017 (as applicable based on availability) Ford Focus or Fiesta (each an “Eligible Vehicle”). Limit one (1) Incentive per Eligible Grad. Eligible Vehicle must be purchased or leased and registered in the name of the Eligible Grad. Each customer will be required to provide proof of status in the form of (a) a copy of the customer's degree/diploma dated within 2 years prior to the vehicle sale date; or (b) an official letter from the Registrar's office confirming graduation within 4 months following the vehicle sale date - the letter must state the Eligible Grad’s name and the length of the program the student is graduating from. Taxes payable before Incentive is deducted. Not combinable with any CPA/GPC or Daily Rental incentives, the Commercial Upfit Program or the Commercial Fleet Incentive Program (CFIP) or any other Targeted Offer Program including the First Time Buyers program. See dealer for details.

65 Escape SE AWD 201: Until September 30, 2016, lease a new 2017 Escape SE AWD 201A for up to 60 months and get 2.49% APR on approved credit (OAC) from Ford Credit Canada Limited. Not all buyers will qualify for the lowest APR payment. Lease 2017 Escape SE AWD 201A with a value of $28,605 (after $1,995 down payment or equivalent trade in and Employee Price Discount of $2,539 deducted and including freight and air tax charges of $1,790) at 2.49% APR for up to 60 months with an optional buyout of $12,261, monthly payment is $316 (the sum of twelve (12) monthly payments divided by 26 periods gives payee a bi-weekly payment of $145.70), total lease obligation is $20,995, interest cost of leasing is $2,546 or 2.49% APR. Additional payments required for PPSA, registration, security deposit, NSF fees (where applicable), excess wear and tear, and late fees. Lease offer excludes options, license, fuel fill charge, insurance, dealer PDI, PPSA (if financed or leased), administration fees, and taxes. Some conditions and mileage restriction of 80,000km for 60 months applies. Excess kilometrage charges are 12¢per km, plus applicable taxes. Excess kilometrage charges subject to change, see your local dealer for details. All prices are based on Manufacturer’s Suggested Retail Price.
Focus SE: Until September 30, 2016, lease a new 2016 Focus SE for up to 60 months and get 0% APR on approved credit (OAC) from Ford Credit Canada Limited. Not all buyers will qualify for the lowest APR payment. Lease 2016 Focus SE with a value of $ $19,434(after $1,645 down payment or equivalent trade in and Employee Price Discount of $1,526 deducted and including freight and air tax charges of $1,700) at 0% APR for up to 60 months with an optional buyout of $7,216, monthly payment is $212 (the sum of twelve (12) monthly payments divided by 26 periods gives payee a bi-weekly payment of $XXX), total lease obligation is $14,365, interest cost of leasing is $102 or 0% APR. Additional payments required for PPSA, registration, security deposit, NSF fees (where applicable), excess wear and tear, and late fees. Lease offer excludes options, license, fuel fill charge, insurance, dealer PDI, PPSA (if financed or leased), administration fees, and taxes. Some conditions and mileage restriction of 80,000km for 60 months applies. Excess kilometrage charges are 12¢per km, plus applicable taxes. Excess kilometrage charges subject to change, see your local dealer for details. All prices are based on Manufacturer’s Suggested Retail Price.

68 2014 Sirius Canada Inc. “SiriusXM”, the SiriusXM logo, channel names and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and are used under license. Sirius™ 6 month pre-paid subscriptions available on select trims of most models (except Transit Connect). See your dealer for full details.

69 Based on Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers' Association sales data for Ford and Lincoln.

71 Until September 30, 2016, receive [$1,955/ $2,685]/ [$1,959/ $4,084]/ [$3,263/ $4,924]/ [$7,322/ $10,117]/ [$2,760/ $6,256]/ [$1,242/$9,781/$10,089/$13,302/$14,310]/ [$8,770/$12,179]/ [$9,337/ $12,501]/[$12,221/$14,307]/ [$684/$1,539/$2,061]/ [$1,817/ $3,971]/ [$743/ $2,110/ $2,577/ $2,595]/ [$4,207/ $5,860/ $5,888/ $6,141]/ [$3,081/ $7,139]/ [$2,275/ $4,820]/ [$1,980/ $2,680]/ [$1,985/ $5,481]/ [$1,334/ $3,035]/ [$1,207/$3,659/$3,727/$4,000]/ [$1,321/$4,879]/ [$1,985/$2,855] / [$13,740] / [$5,813] in total Ford Employee Price adjustments with the purchase or lease of a new 2016: C-MAX [Hybrid SE/Energi SEL]/ Edge [SE FWD/ Sport AWD]/ Escape [S FWD/ Titanium 4x4]/ Expedition [SSV 4x4/ Max Platinum 4x4]/ Explorer [Base FWD/ Platinum 4x4]/ F-150 [XL Regular Cab 4x2 6.5’ box 122” WB/XLT 4x4 SuperCrew 5.5’ box 145” WB / XLT 4x4 SuperCrew 6.5’ box 157” WB/ Platinum 4x4 SuperCrew 5.5’ box 145” WB and 6.5’ box 157” WB/ Limited 4x4 SuperCrew 5.5’ box 145” WB] / F-250 [XL 4x2 SD Regular Cab 8’ box 137” WB/ Lariat 4x4 SD Crew Cab 8’ box 172”WB]/ F-350 [XL 4x2 SD Regular Cab 8’ box 137” WB SRW/ Lariat 4x4 SD Crew Cab 8’ box 172” WB DRW]/ F-450 XL 4x4 SD Crew Cab 8’ box 172” WB / Lariat 4x4 SD Crew Cab 8’ box 172” WB] / Fiesta [S/Titanium/ST]/ Flex [SE FWD/ Limited AWD]/ Focus [S Sedan/ Titanium Hatchback/ ST/ Electric Base]/ Fusion [S FWD Sedan/ Titanium/ Hybrid Titanium/ Energi Titanium]/ Mustang [V6 2dr Fastback/ GT Premium 2dr convertible]/ Taurus [SE FWD/ SHO AWD]/ Transit Connect [XL cargo van / Titanium Wagon] / [F-350 Lariat 4x4 SD Crew Cab 156” WB SRW] / [Mustang GT Coupe] and 2017: Explorer [Base FWD/ Platinum 4x4]/ Escape [S FWD/ Titanium 4x4]/ Fusion [S FWD Sedan/ Hybrid Platinum/Platinum AWD/ Energi Platinum]/ Mustang [V6 2dr Fastback/ GT premium 2dr convertible]/ Transit Connect [XL cargo van / Titanium Wagon]. Total Ford Employee Price adjustments are a combination of Employee Price adjustment of [$1,955/ $2,685]/ [$1,959/ $4,084]/ [$1,263/ $2,924]/ [$5,322/ $8,117]/ [$2,010/ $5,506]/ [$1,242/$5,031/$5,339/$8,552/$9,560]/ [$4,270/$7,679]/[$4,837/ $8,001]/ [$7,721/$9,807] /[$684/$1,539/$2,061]/ [$1,817/ $3,971]/ [$743/ $2,110/ $2,577/ $2,595]/ [$1,207/ $2,860/ $2,888/ $3,141]/ [$1,331/ $4,889]/ [$1,775/ $4,320]/ [$1,980/ $2,680]/ [$1,985/ $5,481]/ [$1,334/ $3,035]/ [$1,207/$3,659/$3,727/$4,000]/ [$1,321/$4,879]/ [$1,985/$2,855] / [$9,240] / [$3,563] and delivery allowance of [$0]/ [$0]/ [$2,000]/ [$2,000]/ [$750]/ [$0/ $4,750/ $4,750/ $4,750/$4,750]/ [$4,500]/ [$4,500]/[$4,500]/[$0]/ [$0]/ [$0]/ [$3,000]/ [$1,750/ $2,250]/ [$500]/ [$0]/ [$0]/ [$0]/ [$0]/ [$0]/ [$0] / [$4,500] / [$2,250]/ -- all chassis cab, stripped chassis, and cutaway body models, F-150 Raptor, F-650/F-750, Mustang Shelby GT350/GT350R, Ford GT, and Focus RS excluded. Employee Price adjustments are not combinable with CPA, GPC, CFIP, Daily Rental Allowance and A/X/Z/D/F-Plan programs. Delivery allowances are not combinable with any fleet consumer incentives.

2016 Focus Titanium
Until September 30, 2016, receive $4,110 in Total Price Adjustments with the purchase or lease of a new 2016 Focus Titanium Hatchback or Sedan with Moonroof and Voice-Activated Navigation system. Total Price adjustments is a combination of Employee Price adjustment of $2,390, delivery allowance of $0, and on-invoice no-charge equipment value of $1,720. Employee Price adjustment is not combinable with CPA, GPC, CFIP, Daily Rental Allowance and A/X/Z/D/F-Plan programs. Delivery allowances are not combinable with any fleet consumer incentives.
2016 F-150 Lariat SuperCrew
Until September 30, 2016, receive $12,280 in Total Price adjustment with the purchase or lease of a new 2016 F-150 Lariat SuperCrew 4x4 5.0L V8 502A. Total Price Adjustment is a combination of Employee Price adjustment of $7,530 and delivery allowance of $4,750 -- all chassis cab, stripped chassis, and cutaway body models, F-150 Raptor, F-650/F-750 excluded. Employee Price adjustment is not combinable with CPA, GPC, CFIP, Daily Rental Allowance and A/X/Z/D/F-Plan programs. Delivery allowances are not combinable with any fleet consumer incentives.
2017 Escape Titanium 4WD 301A with Canadian Touring Package
Employee Price Adjustment amount shown [$3,485] is on the 2017 Escape Titanium 4WD 301A with Canadian Touring Package. Employee Price Adjustment on the 2017 Escape Titanium 4WD without package is $3,035.
2017 Fusion SE 201A
Employee Price Adjustment amount shown [$2,010] is on the 2017 Fusion SE with 201A package. Employee Price Adjustment on the 2017 Fusion SE without package is $1,890.

75 24 months/unlimited km limited warranty on most Genuine Ford/Motorcraft® Parts and Ford Genuine Accessories (purchased from Ford or Ford Lincoln dealers or Ford dealer wholesale customers) for cars and light trucks that are found to be defective in material or workmanship. Parts, labour, and towing covered for ‘dealer installed’ parts/accessories; parts only are covered for ‘over the counter’ retail parts/accessories; parts and labour (up to a maximum of $150) covered for wholesale and fleet parts/accessories. Part and/or accessory failure due to: abuse, misuse, neglect, alteration, accident, racing; improper lubrication, repair, or installation; use in applications for which they were either not designed, or functionally intended, or not approved by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited; cleaning, adjustment or replacement as a part of normal maintenance; or failures caused by non-Ford parts, are not covered under this warranty. Coverage varies between over-the-counter and dealer-installed parts. See your local Ford Store for complete coverage details and limitations.

76 Ford Protection Plan (“FPP”) is only available for purchasers of Ford or Motorcraft® replacement parts for non-commercial cars and light trucks. FPP provides coverage (part only, labour and towing excluded) beyond the expiry of the standard Parts & Accessory Warranty. If a FPP eligible Ford or Motorcraft® part fails due to a defect in material or workmanship, wear out or rust through, it will be replaced at no charge as long as the original purchaser of the part owns the vehicle on which the part was installed. Coverage varies between over-the-counter and dealer-installed parts. See your local Ford Store for complete coverage details and limitations.

78 36 months/unlimited km limited Parts and labour warranty on Remanufactured Gas Engine Assemblies (6006/LGB),) purchased from Ford or Ford Lincoln dealers, that are found to be defective in material or workmanship. Engine failure due to: abuse, misuse, neglect, alteration, accident, racing; improper lubrication, repair, or installation; use in applications for which they were either not designed, or functionally intended, or not approved by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited; cleaning, adjustment or replacement as a part of normal maintenance; or failures caused by non-Ford parts, are not covered under this warranty. See your local Ford Store for complete coverage details and limitations.

79 36 months/unlimited km limited Parts and labour warranty on Remanufactured Transmission Assemblies (7000, 7V000), purchased from Ford or Ford Lincoln dealers, that are found to be defective in material or workmanship. Transmission failure due to: abuse, misuse, neglect, alteration, accident, racing; improper lubrication, repair, or installation; use in applications for which they were either not designed, or functionally intended, or not approved by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited; cleaning, adjustment or replacement as a part of normal maintenance; or failures caused by non-Ford parts, are not covered under this warranty. See your local Ford Store for complete coverage details and limitations.

80 Must be activated prior to operation.

81 24 months/unlimited km limited Parts and labour warranty on Remanufactured Diesel Engine Assemblies (6007/ CALGB, 6006/SLGB), purchased from Ford or Ford Lincoln dealers, that are found to be defective in material or workmanship. Engine failure due to: abuse, misuse, neglect, alteration, accident, racing; improper lubrication, repair, or installation; use in applications for which they were either not designed, or functionally intended, or not approved by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited; cleaning, adjustment or replacement as a part of normal maintenance; or failures caused by non-Ford parts, are not covered under this warranty. See your local Ford Store for complete coverage details and limitations.

83 Ford Employee Pricing (“Employee Pricing”) is available from July 1, 2016 to September 30, 2016 (the “Program Period”), on the purchase or lease of most new 2016/2017 Ford vehicles (excluding all chassis cab, stripped chassis, and cutaway body models, F-150 Raptor, F-650/F-750, Mustang Shelby GT350/GT350R, Ford GT, and Focus RS). Employee Pricing refers to A-Plan pricing ordinarily available to Ford of Canada employees (excluding any Unifor-/CAW-negotiated programs). The new vehicle must be delivered or factory-ordered during the Program Period from your participating Ford Dealer. Employee Pricing is not combinable with CPA, GPC, CFIP, Daily Rental Allowance and A/X/Z/D/F-Plan programs.

84 Class is Fullsize Pickups under 8500 lbs (3856 kg) excluding Diesel versus 2015 Competitors’ 5-cycle ratings. 2015 F-150 4x2 equipped with the 2.7L V6 EcoBoost® and 6-Speed SelectShift® Automatic Transmission, estimated fuel consumption ratings are 12.2L/100km city, 9.2L/100km hwy, 10.9L/100km combined, based on Government of Canada approved test methods. Actual fuel consumption will vary.

85 When properly equipped. Max. towing of 12,200 lbs with available 3.5L EcoBoost V6 4x2 engine configuration. Class is Full-Size Pickups under 8,500 lbs. GVWR vs. 2015 competitors.

86 Class is Small Utilities vs. 2013/2014 competitors. Some driver input required. Requires having available Intelligent Access key on your person. Not available with Class II Trailer.

87 Fuel consumption ratings for F-150 4X2 3.5L V6 GTDI: 12.9L/100km city and 9.0L/100km hwy, based on Government of Canada approved test methods. Actual fuel consumption will vary.

88 F-Series is the best-selling line of pickup trucks in Canada for 50 years in a row based on Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers' Association statistical sales report up to 2015 year end.

89 When properly equipped. Max. payloads of 3,300 lbs/3,270 lbs with 5.0L Ti-VCT V8/3.5L V6 EcoBoost 4x2 engines. Class is Full-Size Pickups under 8,500 lbs. GVWR vs. 2015 competitors.

90 Optional feature; availability varies by model. Features/functionality vary by vehicle/model. Don’t drive while distracted. Use voice-operated systems when possible; don’t use handheld devices while driving. Some features may be locked out while the vehicle is in motion. Not all features are compatible with all phones. Message and data rates may apply. Optional Navigation system map updates cannot be received via wi-fi and require a separate update.

91 You must have a Bluetooth ® -enabled phone paired to your SYNC system. The Bluetooth word mark is a trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. HD Radio is a proprietary trademark of iBiquity Digital Corp. iPad ®. iPod ®. iTunes ®. iPhone ®. and Siri ® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. The term Wi-Fi ® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance ®. Sony is a registered trademark of the Sony Corporation.

92 Government 5-Star Safety Ratings are part of the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's (NHTSA's) New Car Assessment Program (www.SaferCar.gov ).

93 Available feature. SYNC AppLink is available on select models and compatible with select smartphone platforms. Commands may vary by phone and AppLink software.

96 Based on results from the 2015 Vincentric model level analysis of the Canadian consumer market for the Compact Sedan segment.

98 Based on results from the 2015 Vincentric model level analysis of the Canadian consumer market for the Mid Level Compact Crossover segment.

99 Based on results from the 2015 Vincentric model level analysis of the Canadian consumer market for the Mid-Size Crossover segment.

100 Based on the Vincentric 2015 Best Value in Canada awards for the Large Crossover segment.

101 Based on results from the 2015 Vincentric model level analysis of the Canadian consumer market for the Large SUV segment.

102 Based on results from the 2015 Vincentric model level analysis of the Canadian consumer market for the Full-Size 1/2-Ton Pickup segment.

103 Based on results from the 2015 Vincentric model level analysis of the Canadian consumer market for the Full-Size 3/4-Ton Pickup segment.

104 Based on results from the 2015 Vincentric model level analysis of the Canadian consumer market for the Full-Size 1-Ton Pickup segment.

105 Based on IHS Automotive: Polk Canadian Total New Registration data year-end data 2009 – 2015.

106 Driver-assist features are supplemental and do not replace the driver’s attention, judgment and need to control the vehicle. System is active at speeds between approximately 5km/h and 80 km/h. While Pre-Collision Assist with Pedestrian Detection may be especially helpful in unexpected situations, it does not replace the driver and has limitations, including nighttime, low and harsh lighting conditions, vehicles moving in a different direction and certain weather conditions.

107 Until March 31, 2016, qualified customers, on approved credit (OAC) from Ford Credit Canada Limited, receive 1.9% APR purchase financing for 24 month terms on all Certified Pre-Owned Ford vehicles of 2013 – 2016 model year, or 2.9% APR purchase financing for 36 month terms on all Certified Pre-Owned Ford vehicles of 2013 – 2016 model year, or 3.9% APR purchase financing for 48 months terms on all Certified Pre-Owned Ford vehicles of 2013 – 2016 model year, or 3.9% APR purchase financing for 60 and 72 months terms on all Certified Pre-Owned Ford vehicles of 2011 – 2016 model year. Not all buyers will qualify for the lowest interest rate. Example: $25,000 purchase financed at 1.9%APR, monthly payment is $1,062.41 for 24 months; at 2.9%APR, monthly payment is $725.93 for 36 months; at 3.9%APR, monthly payment is $563.36/ $459.29/ $389.99 for 48/60/72 months; cost of borrowing at 1.9% APR is $497.84 for 24 months, at 2.9%APR is $1133.48 over 36 months, and at 3.9%APR is $2041.28/ $2557.40 / $3079.28 over 48/60/72 months; and total to be repaid is $25,762.08/ $26,133.48 over 24/36 months or $27,041.28/ $27,557.40/ $28,079.28 over 48/60/72 months. Down payment on purchase financing offers may be required based on approved credit from Ford Credit Canada Limited.

108 To qualify for Certified Pre-Owned status, each previously owned Ford brand vehicle must be of 2011 to 2016 model year and have less than 120,000 kilometers on the odometer.

110 Available feature. Don’t drive while distracted. Use voice-operated systems when possible; don’t use handheld devices while driving. Android Auto is available on 2017 models with SYNC 3; owners of 2016 models with SYNC 3 are required to perform a software upgrade. Requires phone with compatible version of Android Auto and active data service. SYNC does not control Android Auto while in use. Google is solely responsible for their functionality. Message and data rates may apply. Android Auto is a trademark of Google Inc.

111 Available feature. Don’t drive while distracted. Use voice-operated systems when possible; don’t use handheld devices while driving. Apple CarPlay is available on 2017 models with SYNC 3; owners of 2016 models with SYNC 3 are required to perform a software upgrade and purchase a hardware upgrade. Requires phone with compatible version of Apple iOS and active data service. SYNC does not control CarPlay while in use. Apple is solely responsible for their functionality. Message and data rates may apply. iPad ®. iPod ®. iTunes ®. iPhone ®. Siri ® and Apple CarPlay™ are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

112 SYNC Connect is an optional feature on select 2017 MY vehicles and includes SYNC Connect service, for 5 years from the vehicle sale date as recorded by the dealer, through use of FordPass on select smartphones. Subscription fees apply after 5 years. FordPass is available to download via the App Store ® or Google Play,™ late availability, Spring 2016. Message and data rates may apply. Service may be limited by mobile phone network coverage area. FordPass Terms and Privacy Policy apply.

Get Started, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Orders, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Parts and Service, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Contact Us, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

More Ford, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

2016 Ford Expedition - Owner's Manual (421 pages), 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Manual Description
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print, continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment any time, retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission, replacing a Lost Key Remote.
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles, expedition Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing, manual Climate Control - Vehicles With, towing the Vehicle Four Wheels217.
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto, audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD, audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM, recommend that you take some time.
Get to know your vehicle by reading, your vehicle, the greater safety, pleasure you will get driving it, driving while distracted can result.
Loss of vehicle control, crash, you use extreme caution when using any, device that may take your focus off, while driving and encourage use.
Make sure you are aware all applicable, local laws that may affect use, these are some of symbols you may, the range available models, sometimes.
Even before they generally available, may describe options not fitted, manual may show features used, different models, so they may appear.
Different to you your vehicle, note: Always use operate your vehicle, in line with all applicable laws, note: Pass on manual when selling.
This manual may qualify location, component as left-hand side right-hand, child safety door lock unlock, facilities may access share among them.
Through a direct connection your vehicle, when diagnosing servicing your vehicle, service or repair, Ford Motor Company, ford of Canada, service repair.
To use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report, electronically by Ford Motor Company, ford authorized service facilities, that, the diagnostic information may be used.
This vehicle is equipped with an event, deployment or hitting road obstacle, this data will assist understanding, the event data recorder designed.
Record data related vehicle dynamics, and safety systems short period, of time, typically 30 seconds less, the event data recorder vehicle.
Is designed to record such data as, how various systems your vehicle, how fast vehicle was traveling.

Instructions for your ACCESS® Roll-Up Cover & Accessories, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Below is a list of Installation/Owner Manuals that are intended to provide descriptive and easy to follow instructions. In addition, these manuals will keep you current of factory recommended operation and maintenance techniques. Following the Installation/Owner Manuals is a list of special instructions for non-typical installs for certain model trucks. See *NOTE below for specific information on special instructions. If these instructions do not address your needs, please contact us for additional information that may be available for your specific truck/cover model.

ACCESS® Installation and Owner's Manual:

50213 ACCESS ® Original Roll-Up Cover
50123 ACCESS ® Limited Edition Roll-Up Cover Instructions (use this with ACCESS Original Owner's Manual)
20963 ACCESS ® Toolbox Edition Roll-Up Cover Instructions (use this with ACCESS Original Owner's Manual)
90343 ACCESS ® Toolbox Edition Roll-Up Cover- Bolt-On Toolbox Instructions

LITERIDER® Installation and Owner's Manual:

LORADO® Installation and Owner's Manual:

VANISH® Installation and Owner's Manual:

TONNOSPORT® Installation and Owner’s Manual:

*NOTE: Some model trucks require special insert instructions to aid with installation. See list below for special insert instructions needed for specific model trucks. All special instructions must be used with appropriate Installation/Owner’s Manual listed above.

Chevy/GMC Special Instruction Insert:

Dodge Special Instruction Insert:

Ford Special Instruction Insert:

2003 Ford f150 Owners Manual, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Table of Contents Introduction Instrument Cluster Warning and control lights Gauges 4 12 12 16 Entertainment Systems AM/FM stereo cassette AM/FM stereo with CD AM/FM stereo cassette with CD Rear seat controls 20 20 22 32 35 Climate Controls Manual heating and air conditioning Electronic automatic temperature control Rear window defroster 38 38 40 43 Lights Headlamps Turn signal control Bulb replacement 44 44 46 48 Driver Controls Windshield wiper/washer control Steering wheel adjustment Power windows Mirrors Speed control 54 54 55 60 61 63 Locks and Security Keys Locks Anti-theft system 77 77 77 80 1 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Table of Contents Seating and Safety Restraints Seating Safety restraints Air bags Child restraints 90 90 98 111 119 Driving Starting Brakes Transmission operation Trailer towing 136 136 141 144 165 Roadside Emergencies Getting roadside assistance Hazard flasher switch Fuel pump shut-off switch Fuses and relays Changing tires Jump starting Wrecker towing 176 176 177 177 178 186 193 198 Customer Assistance Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 199 207 Cleaning Maintenance and Specifications Engine compartment Engine oil Battery Fuel information Air filter(s) Part numbers Refill capacities Lubricant specifications 208 216 218 221 225 233 250 255 256 259 2 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Table of Contents Accessories Index 268 272 All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation. Copyright © 2003 Ford Motor Company 3 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Introduction CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it. For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website: • In the United States: www.ford.com • In Canada: www.ford.ca • In Australia: www.ford.com.au • In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx Additional owner information is given in separate publications. This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available. Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle. Fuel pump shut-off switch In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g. collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside emergencies chapter. 4 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Introduction SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury and prevent possible damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment? In this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be read and observed. Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol, it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before touching or attempting adjustment of any kind. Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol. BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break-in. Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles) of new vehicle operation. Vary your speed to allow parts to adjust themselves to other parts. Drive your new vehicle at least 800 km (500 miles) before towing a trailer. Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break-in oils during the first few thousand kilometers (miles) of operation, since these additives may prevent piston ring seating. See Engine oil in the Maintenance and specifications chapter for more information on oil usage. 5 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Introduction SPECIAL NOTICES Emission warranty The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 7.3L Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide. Data Recording Computers in your vehicle are capable of recording detailed data potentially including but not limited to information such as: • the use of restraint systems including seat belts by the driver and passengers, • information about the performance of various systems and modules in the vehicle, and • information related to engine, throttle, steering, brake or other system status. Any of this information could potentially include information regarding how the driver operates the vehicle, potentially including but not limited to information regarding vehicle speed, brake or accelerator application, or steering input. This information may be stored during regular operation or in a crash or near crash event. This stored information may be read out and used by: • Ford Motor Company. • service and repair facilities. • law enforcement or government agencies. • others who may assert a right or obtain your consent to know such information. 6 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Introduction Special instructions For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls. Please read the section Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) in the Seating and safety restraints chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury. Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be used in front of a passenger side air bag unless the air bag can be and is turned OFF. Snowplowing Ford recommends the following specifications for low speed, personal use snow removal: • F-150 4x4 (except F-150 Supercrew, Lightning and Harley-Davidson models) • 5.4L engine • Heavy-duty service package • Super engine cooling • Heavy-duty front suspension package • Automatic transmission with auxiliary automatic transmission fluid cooling • All-terrain tires • Limited slip and optional axle ratio. Do not install a snowplow and plow with your vehicle until it has been driven at least 800 km (500 miles). F150 SuperCrew, F150 5.4L Supercharged “Lightning” and Harley-Davidson F-150 Owners: Snowplowing Your vehicle is not recommended for snowplowing. Ford makes no representation as to the suitability of your vehicle for snowplowing, in particular regarding the potential for exceeding vehicle weight limits, airbag (SRS) deployment sensitivity, vehicle crash integrity, or powertrain durability. The Snowplow Package Option is not available. 7 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Introduction Using your vehicle as an ambulance Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance. Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package. Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death. Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter. Notice to owners of natural gas fueled vehicles Before you drive your vehicle, be sure to read the Dedicated Natural Gas Vehicle supplement. This book contains important operation and maintenance information. Notice to owners of F150 5.4L Supercharged “Lightning” vehicles Before you drive your vehicle, be sure to read the “SVT Lightning Truck Owner’s Guide Supplement.” This book contains important operation and maintenance information. Notice to owners of the Harley-Davidson F-150 Note: Your vehicle is not designed to be operated off-road. The undercab chrome bars are for decorative purposes only. Do not step on these bars to enter or exit the vehicle. Harley-Davidson F-150 vehicles are equipped with high performance tires. When first driving the vehicle after is has been parked, you may experience a temporary ride disturbance. This is a characteristic of the tires used on the Harley-Davidson vehicles and should be no reason for concern. The condition should correct itself within 10–15 miles of driving. 8 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Introduction MIDDLE EAST/NORTH AFRICA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the ones that are described in this Owner Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this Owner Guide for all other required information and warnings. 9 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle. Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert See Owner’s Guide Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front Air Bag-Side Child Seat Installation Warning Child Seat Tether Anchor Anti-Lock Brake System Child Seat Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based AdvanceTrac Traction Control Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Defrost/Demist Windshield Wash/Wipe Rear Window Defrost/Demist 10 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Power Windows Front/Rear Child Safety Door Lock/Unlock Panic Alarm Engine Coolant Power Window Lockout Interior Luggage Compartment Release Symbol Engine Oil Engine Coolant Temperature Battery Do Not Open When Hot Avoid Smoking, Flames, or Sparks Explosive Gas Battery Acid Fan Warning Maintain Correct Fluid Level Engine Air Filter Jack MAX MIN Power Steering Fluid Emission System Passenger Compartment Air Filter Check fuel cap Low tire warning 11 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES Standard instrument cluster Optional instrument cluster Harley—Davidson instrument cluster DOOR AJAR THEFT 60 70 80 50 H 3 2 RPMX1000 L SERVICE ENGINE SOON F 40 30 60 20 40 10 20 0 MPH 80 100 120 90 140 100 160 110 180 120 200 130 km/h 4 5 H L 1 0 SELECT/RESET 6 BRAKE CRUISE H E D P RN D 2 PREMIUM UNLEADED FUEL ONLY C 12 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Instrument Cluster Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions. Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the respective system inspected immediately. Service engine soon: The Service SERVICE engine soon indicator light ENGINE illuminates when the ignition is first SOON turned to the ON position to check the bulb. Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately. Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire. Check fuel cap: Illuminates when the fuel cap may not be properly installed. Continued driving with this light on may cause the Service engine soon warning light to come on. Refer to Fuel filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. Brake system warning light: To confirm the brake system warning light is functional, it will momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned to the ON position when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START, or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek service immediately from your dealership. Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your servicing dealership. 13 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Instrument Cluster Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle checked by your dealer immediately. Anti-lock brake system: If the ABS light stays illuminated or ABS continues to flash, a malfunction has been detected, have the system serviced immediately. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated. Air bag readiness: If this light fails to illuminate when ignition is turned to ON, continues to flash or remains on, have the system serviced immediately. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been detected. Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten your safety belt. A chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt. Charging system: Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. Oil pressure/Engine coolant: Illuminates when any of the following conditions has occurred: • The engine coolant temperature is high. • The engine oil pressure is low. 14 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Instrument Cluster Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at, or near empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter). Low washer fluid: Illuminates when the windshield washer fluid is low. LOW FUEL Speed control: Illuminates when CRUISE the speed control is activated. Turns off when the speed control system is deactivated. Transmission control indicator light (TCIL): Illuminates when the OVERDRIVE overdrive function of the transmission has been turned off, refer to the Driving chapter. If the light flashes steadily or does not illuminate, have the transmission serviced soon, or damage may occur. Four wheel drive low LOW (if equipped): Illuminates when RANGE four-wheel drive low is engaged. Four wheel drive indicator (if equipped): Illuminates when four-wheel drive is engaged. Anti-theft system (if equipped): Flashes when the Securilock Passive Anti-theft System has been activated. Door ajar: Illuminates when the ignition is in the ON position and any door is open. 4x4 DOOR AJAR 15 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Instrument Cluster Turn signal: Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard lights are turned on. If the indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb. High beams: Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on. Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACC position and the driver’s door is opened. Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off (and the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened. GAUGES Standard instrument cluster gauges Optional instrument cluster gauges 16 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Instrument Cluster Harley—Davidson instrument cluster gauges DOOR AJAR THEFT H L LOW FUEL SERVICE ENGINE SOON F 50 40 80 30 60 20 40 10 20 0 MPH 60 70 80 100 120 90 100 160 110 180 120 200 130 km/h 140 RPMX1000 H L SELECT/RESET H BRAKE CRUISE E D P RN D 2 PREMIUM UNLEADED FUEL ONLY C Speedometer: Indicates the current vehicle speed. Engine coolant temperature gauge: Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature, the needle will be in the normal range (between “H” and “C”). If it enters the red section, the engine is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool. H C Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. Odometer: Registers the total kilometers (miles) of the vehicle. 17 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Instrument Cluster Trip odometer: Registers the kilometers (miles) of individual journeys. Press the control once to D P RN D switch from the odometer to the trip odometer. To reset the trip, press the control again until the trip reading is 0.0 miles. Tachometer (if equipped): Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute. Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine. Battery voltage gauge: Indicates the battery voltage when the ignition is in the ON position. If the pointer moves and stays outside the normal operating range (as indicated by arrows), have the vehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as possible. 2 H L Engine oil pressure gauge: Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle should stay in the normal operating range (between “L” and “H”). If the needle falls below the normal range, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and check the engine oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your dealership or by a qualified technician. H L 18 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Instrument Cluster Fuel gauge: Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the ignition is in the ON position). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade. Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information. F E 19 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems AM/FM STEREO CASSETTE 12 13 AM 14 15 16 17 1 2 CLK 3 4 VOL - PUSH ON FM1 ST BASS TREB BAL FADE FM TAPE AMS 11 SEEK 10 9 1 SCAN EJ TUNE SIDE REW 1-2 FF 2 3 4 5 6 8 1. Balance: Press to shift sound to the left/right speakers. 2. Fade: Press to shift sound to the rear/front speakers. 7 6 5 3. CLK: To set the hour, press and hold CLK. Then press SEEK to or increase the decrease hours. CLK To set the minute, press and hold CLK and press TUNE to decrease or increase the minutes. 20 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems TAPE 4. Tape AMS: In tape mode, press AMS and hold to activate Automatic Music Search (allows you to quickly locate the beginning of the tape selection being played or to skip to the next selection). Then, press REW (for the beginning of the current selection) or FF (to advance to the next selection). The tape MUST have a blank section of at least four seconds duration between programs. 5. Side 1–2: Press to change tape SIDE 1 - 2 direction. 6. REW (rewind): Press to rewind the tape. FF (fast forward): Press to advance the tape. 7. Memory preset buttons: To set a station: Select frequency band AM/FM1/FM2; tune to a station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. REW FF Dolby noise reduction: Works in tape mode only. Reduces tape 8. noise and hiss; press to activate/deactivate. 9. Scan: Press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of all listenable radio stations or all tape selections. Press again to stop. 10. Tune: Works in radio mode only. / to change Press TUNE frequency down/up 11. Seek: Press and / for previous/next release strong station, selection or track. 12. Power/volume: Press to turn ON/OFF; turn to increase or decrease volume levels. 21 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems 13. AM/FM: Press to choose a frequency band in radio mode. / to 14. Bass: Press decrease/increase the bass output. / to 15. Treble: Press decrease/increase the treble output. 16. EJ (Eject): Press to eject a tape. EJ 17. Cassette door: Insert a cassette into the cassette door. AM/FM STEREO / SINGLE CD RADIO 13 14 15 16 17 18 AM FM BASS CD TREB FM1 ST 1 2 SCN 3 4 VOL - PUSH ON BAL FADE CLK 12 SEEK TUNE DISC EJ COMP DISCS 11 CD CD SHUFFLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 9 8 7 6 5 22 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems / to shift 1. Balance: Press sound to the left/right speakers. / to shift 2. Fade: Press sound to the front/rear speakers. 3. SCN (Scan): Press to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations or CD tracks. Press again to stop. 4. CLK: To set the hour, press and hold CLK and press SEEK to or increase the decrease hours. CLK To set the minute, press and hold CLK and press TUNE to decrease or increase the minutes. 5. EJ (eject): Press to eject a CD. 6. COMP (Compression): In CD mode, press to bring louder and softer levels into more comfortable listening level. The compression icon (c) will appear in the display. SHUFFLE 7. Shuffle: Press to listen to the 6 tracks on the CD in random order. Press again to turn off. 8. Memory presets: To set a CD CD SHUFFLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 station: Select frequency band AM/FM; tune to a station. Press and hold a preset button until sound returns. This radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls which allow you to set up to six AM stations and 12 FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). Press and hold until 9. CD: desired selection is reached. 23 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems 10. CD: Press and hold until desired selection is reached. 11. Tune / Discs: In radio mode, press to move up or down the frequency band in individual increments. 12. Seek: Press and release / for previous/next SEEK strong station, selection or track. 13. Power/volume: Press to turn ON/OFF; turn to increase or decrease volume levels. 14. CD: Press to enter CD mode or to play a CD already loaded into the system. 15. AM/FM: Press to choose a frequency band in radio mode. / to 16. Bass: Press increase/decrease the bass output. / to 17. Treble: Press increase/decrease the treble output. 18. CD door: Insert a CD printed side up. DISC 24 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems CD unit are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75 in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information. PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/SINGLE CD RADIO 17 18 19 1 BASS 2 3 BAL SEL 16 15 14 13 VOL PUSH ON CD TREB FADE EJ 4 5 6 MUTE SCAN SEEK TUNE AUTO RDS AM FM REW FF COMP SHUFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 12 11 10 9 8 BASS TREB 7 1. Bass: Press BASS and the press SEL to increase/decrease the amount of bass output. 25 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems Treble: Press TREB and then press SEL to increase/decrease the amount of treble output. BASS TREB 2. Select: Press and release / for previous/next SEEK strong station, selection or track. 3. Balance: Press BAL then press SEL to shift the sound from to the left/right speakers. Fade: Press FADE then press SEL to shift the sound from the front/rear speakers. 4. Eject: Press to eject a CD. SEL BAL FADE BAL FADE 5. RDS: Allows your audio system to receive station identification or program type from RDS-equipped FM radio stations. Press RDS then press SEL to activate/deactivate: Traffic: Allows you to hear traffic broadcasts. With the feature ON, press SEEK or SCAN to find a station broadcasting a traffic report (if it is broadcasting RDS data).Traffic information is not available in most U.S. markets. FIND Program type: Allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies, R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40. Show TYPE: Displays the station’s call letters and format. Setting the clock: Press RDS until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS is / ) displayed. Use the SEL control to manually increase/decrease ( the time. 26 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems 6. AUTO: Allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations. Select a frequency and press AUTO. Once the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in memory 1 will begin to play. To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set memory stations, press the control again. 7. Shuffle: Press to play the CD tracks in random order. 8. Compression: Compression adjust brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press to activate/deactivate. 9. Fast forward: Press to advance FF 2 on the CD. Press and hold for a more fast advance. 10. Rewind: Press for a slow rewind. Press and hold for a fast rewind. 11. Memory presets: These controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). Select the desired station. Press and hold the memory preset control until the sound returns indicating it has been saved. 12. AM/FM: Press to select from AM FM the AM/FM frequency bands. 13. Tune: Press to manually move or down the frequency up band or to the next/previous CD in the CD changer (if equipped). 14. Scan: Press to hear a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks. TUNE SCAN 27 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems 15. Mute: Press to mute the playing media. 16. Seek: Press to listen to the or next listenable previous radio station or CD track. 17. CD: Press to enter CD mode if in another mode. Press CD to begin CD play if a CD is already loaded into the system. 18. Power/volume: Press to turn on/off; turn to increase or decrease volume levels. SEEK 19. CD door: Insert a CD, label side up. PREMIUM IN-DASH SIX CD SOUND SYSTEM 1. Seek: Press and release / for previous/next SEEK strong station, or track of current disc. 28 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems 2. Rewind: Press for a slow rewind, press and hold for a fast rewind. Fast forward: Press for a slow advance, press and hold for a fast advance. 3. Comp (Compression): In CD mode, press to adjust the soft and loud passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press the COMP control until COMP ON is displayed. 4. Mute: Press to MUTE playing media; press again return to playing media. In CD mode, MUTE acts as a pause feature. 5. Eject: Press to eject a CD. Press and hold to auto eject all loaded discs. 6. Bass: Press BASS; then press / to decrease/increase SEL the bass output. Treble: Press TREB; then press / to decrease/increase SEL the treble output. 7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade controls to adjust levels. Use with MENU to set the clock and engage RDS. 8. Balance: Press BAL; then press / to shift sound to the SEL left/right speakers. Fade: Press FADE; then press / to shift sound to the SEL rear/front speakers. 29 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems 9. Menu: Press MENU and SEL to access clock mode, RDS on/off, Traffic, Program type, Show type and Compression modes. Traffic: Allows you to hear traffic broadcasts. With the feature ON, press SEEK or SCAN to find a station broadcasting a traffic report (if it is broadcasting RDS data). Traffic information is not available in most U.S. markets. FIND Program type: Allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for a certain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies, R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40. Show TYPE: Displays the station’s format (i.e. Jazz, Classic, Country, Info, Oldies, R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft and Top 40). Show NAME: Displays station’s call letters. Show NONE: Nothing appears in the display. Compression: Brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level. Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINUTE is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase ( ) or decrease ) the hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode. ( 10. Memory presets: To set a station: Select frequency band AM/FM; tune to a station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. In CD mode, press to move between CDs. This radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls which allow you to set up to six AM stations and 12 FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2). 11. CD: Press to select CD mode. Seamless play: In CD mode, the transition between the end of one CD and the beginning of another will not contain delay time unless SEEK or a preset control is pressed. 12. AM/FM: Press to select a frequency band in radio mode. Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2. Press and momentarily hold AM/FM. 30 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems AUTOSET will flash on the display. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets. Press and momentarily hold to disengage (AUTOSET OFF will appear in the display.). 13. Power/volume: Press to turn ON/OFF; turn to increase or decrease volume levels. 14. Load: Press to load a CD. Press and hold to load up to six discs. 15. Shuffle: Press to play tracks in random order. Press SHUF to cycle through SHUF DISC, SHUF TRAC or SHUF OFF. 16. Scan: Press to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations or CD tracks. Press again to stop. 17. Disc/Tune: Radio: Press or to manually tune down or up the frequency band. or to select the previous or next track on the CD. CD: Press 18. CD door: Insert a CD label side up. 31 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD 1. Power/volume: Press to turn ON/OFF; turn clockwise/counterclockwise to increase/decrease volume. 2. Scan: Press SCAN to move up SCAN the radio frequency band. SCAN automatically finds a station, plays it for five seconds, then moves to the next station. Press again to stop. Tape/CD: Press SCAN to sample tape/CD selections for eight seconds. Press again to stop. 3. CD Door: Insert the disc with the playing side down and printed side up. 32 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems 4. Cassette door: Insert the cassette with the opening to the right. 5. Eject: Press to eject the cassette/CD. The radio will resume playing. 6. Tape: Press to stop tape during rewind/fast forward. CD: Press to start CD play. With the dual media audio, press CD to toggle between single CD and CD changer play. 7. Mute: Press to MUTE playing media; press again return to playing media. 8. Auto: Press to set first six strong stations into AM, FM1 or FM2 memory buttons; press again to return to normal stations. 9. CLOCK: Press the CLK control until SELECT HOUR is displayed to decrease the then press SEL to increase the hours. hours or To set the minute, press CLK control until SELECT MIN is displayed then press SEL to increase the minutes. the minutes or to decrease 33 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems 10. Balance: Press BAL; then press / to shift sound to the SEL left/right speakers. Fade: Press FADE; then press / to shift sound to the SEL rear/front speakers. 11. Memory preset buttons: To set a station: Select frequency band AM/FM; tune to a station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. 12. Shuffle (CD): Press to play tracks in random order. 13. Compression (CD): Press to bring soft and loud passages together for a more consistent listening level. Dolby noise reduction: 14. Reduces tape noise and hiss; press to activate/deactivate. 15. Side 1–2: Press to play reverse side of the tape. 16. Fast Forward (FF): Press to fast forward the tape. 17. Rewind (REW): Press to rewind the tape. FF 2 REW 1 34 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems 18. Select (SEL): Use with Bass, Treble, Balance, Fade and Clock controls. 19. Bass: Press BASS; then press / to decrease/increase SEL the bass output. SEL Treble: Press TREB; then press / to decrease/increase SEL the treble output. 20. Tune: Works in radio mode only. / to change Press TUNE frequency down/up. SEEK TUNE 21. Seek: Press and release / for previous/next SEEK strong station, selection or track. SEEK TUNE 22. AM/FM: Press to select AM/FM frequency band. REAR AUDIO CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED) The rear seat controls allow the rear seat passengers to operate the radio, tape, CD or CD changer or in-vehicle entertainment system mode (if equipped). To engage, simultaneously press the memory preset controls 3 and 5. Press again to disengage. 35 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems 1. Mode: Push to toggle between AM, FM1, FM2, tape, CD or CD changer mode (if equipped). 2. Memory: Push successively to allow rear seat passengers to scroll through memory presets. Push in CD changer mode (if equipped) to advance to the next disc. 3. Headphone jack: Plug a 3.5 mm headphone into the jack. 4. Headphone/speaker: Press to turn all speakers off (headphone mode). Press again to deactivate the headphone and activate system speakers. 5. Seek: Press or to access the previous or next station, selection or track. 6. Volume: Press + to increase and — to decrease volume levels. From the rear seat controls, volume can not be set higher than the front seat setting. RADIO FREQUENCIES AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are: AM - 530, 540–1600, 1610 kHz FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS There are three factors that can effect radio reception: • Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception. • Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. • Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed. CASSETTE/PLAYER CARE Do: • Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less. 36 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Entertainment Systems • Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole and turning the hub. • Remove loose labels before inserting tapes. • Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing. • Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after 10–12 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation. Don’t: • Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold. • Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being played. CD/CD PLAYER CARE Do: • Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface. • Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out. Don’t: • Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time. • Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changers. • Clean using a circular motion. CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75 in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information. AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician. 37 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Climate Controls HEATER ONLY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. 2. Temperature selection: Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle. 3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control. Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents. O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents. Distributes outside air through the floor vents. Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and floor vents. Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents. OPERATING TIPS • To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place position. the air flow selector in the • To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position. • Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents. • Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air flow to the back seats. • Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather: 1. Select 2. Set the temperature control to full heat 3. Set the fan speed to HI 38 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Climate Controls 4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel. Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle. 2. Temperature selection: Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle. 3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control. MAX A/C: Uses recirculated air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the instrument panel vents only. A/C: Uses outside air to cool the vehicle. Air flows from the instrument panel vents only. Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents. O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents. Distributes outside air through the floor vents. Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and floor vents. Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents. OPERATING TIPS • To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place position. the air flow selector in the • To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF or MAX A/C position. • Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents. 39 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Climate Controls • Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats. • Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather: 1. Select 2. Select A/C 3. Modulate the temperature control to maintain comfort. 4. Set the fan speed to HI 5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel. Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EATC) SYSTEM 40 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Climate Controls Temperature conversion: Press the MAX A/C and DEF at the same time (for one second) to switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius. The English/Metric (E/M) control on the trip computer and message center (if equipped) will not change temperature display. 1. OFF: Press to turn the system OFF. 2. AUTOMATIC: Press to engage automatic mode. The system will determine fan speed, airflow location, and outside or recirculated air depending on the selected temperature. Fan speed will remain automatic unless the thumbwheel is turned. Rear defrost (if equipped): Removes ice and fog from the rear window. 3. Fan speed: Turn to manually increase or decrease fan speed. Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster 4. Defrost: vents. 5. Floor/defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster and floor vents. 6. Floor: Distributes outside air through the floor vents. 7. Panel/floor: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel and floor vents. 41 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Climate Controls 8. Vent: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents. 9. Max A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle. 10. Manual override controls: Press any of these controls to leave automatic mode and to manually determine where airflow is directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO. 11. Outside Temp: Press to display the outside temperature. Will remain in the display until pressed again. The temperature will be most accurate when the vehicle is in motion. AUTO: Press to engage automatic mode. The system will determine fan speed, airflow location, and outside or recirculated air depending on the selected temperature. Fan speed will remain automatic unless the thumbwheel is turned. 12. Temperature controls: Press to increase or decrease the desired temperature. In automatic mode, the system will determine the fan speed, airflow location, outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to the selected temperature. 13. EXT: Press to display the outside temperature. This temperature will remain in the display until pressed again. The temperature will be most accurate when the vehicle is in motion. OPERATING TIPS • To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place the air flow selector in the position. • To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF or MAX A/C position. • Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents. • Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats. • Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield. 42 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Climate Controls To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather: 1. Select 2. Select A/C 3. Modulate the temperature control to maintain comfort. 4. Set the fan speed to HI 5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel. Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop. REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER (IF EQUIPPED) R The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and works to defrost your rear windshield from fog and ice. If equipped, it also operates the heated mirror to remove snow and ice from the side mirrors. Ensure that the ignition is ON position. Press to turn the defroster ON/OFF. The indicator light will illuminate when ON. 43 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Lights HEADLAMP CONTROL Turns the lamps off. Turns on the parking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and tail lamps. Turns the headlamps on. A Autolamp control (if equipped) The autolamp system sets the headlamps to turn on and off automatically. It also keeps the lights on for approximately 20 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. • To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise. • To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to the OFF position. A • Foglamps are not controlled by the autolamps. In order to turn on the position and foglamps, you must turn the lamp switch to the pull toward you for foglamps. Foglamp control (if equipped) The foglamps can be turned on only when the headlamp control is in position and the high the beams are not turned on. Pull headlamp control towards you to turn foglamps on. The foglamp will illuminate. indicator light A 44 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Lights Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped) Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output. To activate: • the ignition must be in the ON position and • the headlamp control is in the OFF, parking lamp or autolamp position. Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system does not activate with your tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision. High beams Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate. Pull the lever towards you to deactivate. Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate. 45 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Lights PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and all applicable switches in the vehicle during headlamp and parklamp operation. Move the control to the full upright position, past detent, to turn on the interior lamps. Move the control to the full down position, past detent, to turn off the interior lamps. AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by a qualified service technician. TURN SIGNAL CONTROL • Push down to activate the left turn signal. • Push up to activate the right turn signal. 46 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Lights INTERIOR LAMPS Map lamps To turn on the map lamps, press the control next to each lamp. If equipped with a moon roof, press the control next to the map lamp to illuminate the lamp. AUTO ROOF Rear dome lamp (if equipped) The dome lamp lights when the control is in the DOOR (left) position, any door is open, the instrument panel switch is pushed past the detent and when any of the remote entry controls are pressed while the ignition is off. The rear dome lamp can be turned ON (center) or OFF (right) by sliding the control. 47 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Lights Courtesy/reading lamps The dome lamp lights when the control is in the DOOR (left) position, any door is open, the instrument panel switch is pushed past the detent and when any of the remote entry controls are pressed while the ignition is off. The reading lamps can be turned on by pressing the rocker controls next to each lamp. Rear door lamps (if equipped) The dome lamp lights when the control is in the DOOR (left) position, any door is open, the instrument panel switch is pushed past the detent and when any of the remote entry controls are pressed while the ignition is off. The rear door lamps can be turned on by pressing the rocker controls next to each lamp. BULBS Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently. Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an “E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time. 48 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Lights Function Number of bulbs 2 2 2 2 2 Trade number Headlamps 9007 Front park/turn lamps 3157K Foglamps 91451 Backup lamp 3156K Rear stop/turn/sidemarker/tail 3457K lamp High-mount brakelamp 1 912 Cargo lamp 2 912 License plate lamp 2 168 Signal mirror lamp (if equipped) 2 906/921 Running board lamp (if equipped) 4 168 All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted. To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer 1 Harley Davidson package uses bulb number H1 12V Replacing headlamp bulbs 1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open the hood. 2. At the back of the headlamp, pull clips rearward and up (about 3⁄4 inch) to release the headlamp assembly. 3. Slide headlamp assembly forward and disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward. 49 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Lights 4. Remove bulb retainer ring by turning it counterclockwise, then slide the ring off the plastic base. 5. Carefully pull bulb assembly out of headlamp assembly and replace. Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. Install the new bulb in reverse order. Replacing front parking lamp/turn signal bulbs 1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open the hood. 2. Remove screw from the lamp assembly and disengage lamp assembly by pulling straight forward, to disengage two hidden snap-in retainers. 50 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Lights 3. Remove bulb socket from the parking lamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise. 4. Pull bulb straight out of socket and press in the new bulb. Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order. Replacing tail/brake/turn signal/backup lamp bulbs 1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position. 2. Open the liftgate to expose the lamp assembly screws and remove the two bolts from the tail lamp assembly. 3. Carefully pull the lamp assembly straight rearward from the tailgate pillar to disengage two hidden snap-in retainers. (Flare side and Super Crew tail lamps are not equipped with snap-in retainers.) 4. Remove bulb socket from the lamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise. 5. Pull bulb straight out of socket and press in the new bulb. Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order. 51 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Lights Replacing high-mount brake and cargo lamp bulbs Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position. 1. Remove the two screws and move the lamp assembly away from the vehicle to expose the bulb sockets. 2. Remove the bulb socket by rotating counterclockwise and pulling it out of the lamp assembly. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb. Install the new bulbs in reverse order. Replacing foglamp bulbs (if equipped) 1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position. 2. Remove the bulb socket from the foglamp by turning counterclockwise. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the foglamp bulb. Install the new bulb in reverse order. Replacing signal mirror lamp bulbs (if equipped) For bulb replacement, see a dealer or qualified technician. Replacing license plate lamp bulbs The license plate bulbs are located behind the rear bumper. To change the license plate lamp bulbs: 1. Reach behind the rear bumper to locate the bulb. 2. Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise and carefully pull to remove it from the lamp assembly. 3. Pull out the old bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb. 4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise. 52 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Lights Replacing running board lamp bulbs (if equipped) The running board bulbs are located behind the running board. 1. Reach behind the center bracket of the running board to locate the bulb. 2. Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise and carefully pull to remove it from the lamp assembly. 3. Pull out the old bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb. Install the new bulb in reverse order. 53 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper: Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers; rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers. Speed dependent wipers: When the wiper control is on, the speed of the wipers will automatically adjust with the vehicle speed. The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the wipers will go. Windshield washer: Push the end of the stalk: • briefly: causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid. • a quick push and hold: the wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid. • a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds. CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1. Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm. Push the lock pin manually to release the blade and pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm. 2. Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard. 3. Replace wiper blades every 6 months for optimum performance. 54 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED) To adjust the steering wheel: 1. Pull and hold the steering wheel release control toward you. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down until you find the desired location. 3. Release the steering wheel release control. This will lock the steering wheel in position. Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving. ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED) Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamps. OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED) The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to your option package. Storage compartment (if equipped) Press the OPEN control to open the storage compartment. The door will open slightly and can be moved to full open. The storage compartment may be used to secure sunglasses or a similar object. 55 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls Installing a garage door opener (if equipped) The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of aftermarket garage door openers: 1. Place Velcro hook onto side of aftermarket transmitter opposite of actuator control. 2. Place the transmitter into storage compartment, control down. 3. Place the provided height adaptors onto the back of the garage control as needed. 4. Press the garage control to activate the transmitter. Electronic compass/temperature display (if equipped) Outside air temperature The outside temperature display is contained in the overhead console unless the vehicle is equipped with an EATC system. Refer to Electric automatic temperature control in the Climate controls chapter. The temperature display can be turned off and on by pressing the 73˚ NW SELECT control on the overhead console. The temperature can be displayed in Centigrade or Fahrenheit by pressing the SELECT control. The ignition key must be in the ON or ACC position. 56 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls If the outside temperature falls below 3°C (38°F), the display will alternate from “ICE” to the outside temperature at a two second rate for one minute. Compass The compass display is contained in the overhead console. The vehicle heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW. The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic or metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy. Adjustments may need to be made to the zone and calibration of the compass. Compass zone adjustment 1. Determine which magnetic zone you are in by referring to the zone map. 2. Turn the ignition to the ON position. 3 2 4 5 1 15 14 13 12 6 7 8 9 1011 3. Press and hold the SELECT control until VAR appears in the display, then release. The display should show the current zone number. 9 4. Press the SELECT control until the desired zone number appears. The display will flash and then return to normal operation. The zone is now updated. VAR 57 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls Compass calibration adjustment Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines: • Press and hold the SELECT control until CAL appears in the CAL display (approximately eight seconds) and release. • Drive the vehicle slowly (less than 5 km/h [3 mph]) in circles until CAL indicator turns off in about 2–3 complete circles. • The compass is now calibrated. AUXILIARY POWER POINT Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty. The auxiliary power point is located on the instrument panel. Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter. Use the power point. Auxiliary power point (Harley-Davidson F-150 only) A additional auxiliary power point is located on the lower rear side of the console. The power point is accessible from the rear seats. 58 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls Auxiliary power point (SuperCrew only) An additional auxiliary power point is located on the right side rear trim panel next to the rear seat. CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED) The center console offers several useful storage features. These include: • Large utility compartment • Cupholders • Coin holder slots • PalmPilot /PDA holder • Pen holder • Power point • Tissue holder • Cassette/CD organizer slots Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you in a collision. CELL PHONE USE The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits. Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular phones, pagers, portable email devices, in vehicle communications systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios. 59 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to operate Mobile Communications Equipment. POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED) When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings. Press and hold the bottom part of the rocker switch to open the window. Press and hold the top part of the rocker switch to close the window. One touch down Allows the driver’s window to open fully without holding the control down. Press completely down on AUTO and release quickly. Press again to stop. Accessory delay (if equipped) With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until any door is opened. 60 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls Power rear slider window (if equipped) • Press and hold the open arrow side of control to open window. • Press and hold the closed arrow side of control to close window. MIRRORS Automatic dimming rear view mirrors (if equipped) Your vehicle is equipped with an inside rear view mirror with an auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change from the normal state to the non-glare state when bright lights (glare) reach the inside rear view mirror. When the inside rear view mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle, the inside rear view mirror will automatically adjust (darken) to minimize glare. Do not block the sensor on the backside of the inside rear view mirror since this may impair proper system performance. Press the control to turn the mirror OFF or AUTO. The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R (Reverse)(when the mirror is on) to ensure a bright clear view when backing up. OFF AUTO Power side view mirrors (if equipped) To adjust your mirrors 1. Select L to adjust the left mirror or R to adjust the right mirror. 2. Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror. 3. Return to the center position to disable the adjust function. 61 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls Heated outside mirrors (if equipped) Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice, mist and fog. The mirrors are activated when the vehicle is running and the glass is below freezing. Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors. Signal mirrors (if equipped) When the turn signal is activated, the outer portion of the appropriate mirror housing will blink red. This provides an additional warning to other drivers that your vehicle is about to turn. Fold-away mirrors Pull the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space, like an automatic car wash. POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED) The accelerator and brake pedal PEDALS should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stopped and the gearshift lever is in the P (Park) position. Press and hold the rocker control to adjust accelerator and brake pedal toward you or away from you. The adjustment allows for approximately 76 mm (3 inches) of maximum travel. 62 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving. SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 48 km/h (30 mph) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed control does not work at speeds below 48 km/h (30 mph). Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved. Setting speed control The controls for using your speed control are located on the steering wheel for your convenience. 1. Press the ON control and release it. 2. Accelerate to the desired speed. 3. Press the SET ACCEL control and release it. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. 5. The indicator light on the instrument cluster will turn on. Note: • Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill. • If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed. • If the vehicle speed decreases more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage. ON ON OFF OFF RES RSM SET ACCEL SET ACCEL COAST COAST 63 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls Resuming a set speed Press the RES/RSM (resume) control and release it. This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed. The RES/RSM control will not work if the vehicle speed is not faster than 48 km/h (30 mph). RES RSM SET ACCEL SET ACCEL COAST COAST Increasing speed while using speed control There are two ways to set a higher speed: RSM • Press and hold the SET ACCEL SET control until you get to the desired speed, then release the COAST control. You can also use the SET ACCEL control to operate the Tap-Up function. Press and release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1.6 km/h (1 mph). RES SET ACCEL ACCEL COAST • Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET ACCEL control. Reducing speed while using speed control There are two ways to reduce a set speed: RSM • Press and hold the COAST SET control until you get to the desired speed, then release the COAST control. You can also use the COAST control to operate the Tap-Down function. Press and release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1.6 km/h (1 mph). RES SET ACCEL ACCEL COAST 64 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls • Depress the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached, press the SET ACCEL control. RES RSM SET ACCEL SET ACCEL COAST COAST Turning off speed control There are two ways to turn off the speed control: • Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped). This will not erase your vehicle’s previously set speed. • Press the speed control OFF control. Note: When you turn off the speed ON control or the ignition, your speed control set speed memory is erased. OFF ON OFF Indicator light This light comes on when either the CRUISE SET ACCEL or RES controls are pressed. The vehicle speed must be at or above 48 km/h (30 mph). It turns off when the speed control OFF control is pressed, the brake or clutch is applied, or the ignition is turned to the OFF position. ONE-TOUCH MOON ROOF (IF EQUIPPED) • To open, press and release the rear portion of the moon roof control. • To close, press and hold (as desired) the front portion of the moon roof control. • To halt motion at any point during one-touch opening, press the control a second time. AUTO ROOF 65 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls • To tilt into the vent position (when the glass panel is closed), press and hold the front portion of the moon roof control. To close from the vent position, press and hold the rear portion of the control until the glass panel stops moving. • The moon roof has a sliding shade that can be manually opened or closed when the glass panel is shut. • To close the shade, pull it toward the front of the vehicle. Do not let children play with the moon roof. They may seriously hurt themselves. HOMELINK WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM WITH TRAVELNOTE (IF EQUIPPED) The HomeLink Wireless Control System, located on the driver’s visor, provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gate operators, security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting. When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of the way to prevent potential harm or damage. Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink equipped vehicle purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to Programming in this section. Programming Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage. Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink. It is 66 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. 1. Press and hold the two outside buttons releasing only when the red light begins to flash after 20 REC DEL PLAY seconds. Do not repeat step one to program additional hand-held transmitters to the remaining two HomeLink buttons. This will erase previously programmed hand-held transmitter signals into HomeLink. 2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 2–8 cm (1–3 inches) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program (located on your visor) while keeping the red light in view. 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter button. Do not release REC DEL PLAY the buttons until step 4 has been completed. Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace step 3 with procedures noted in the “Gate Operator and Canadian Programming” section for Canadian residents. 4. The red light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both buttons when the red light flashes rapidly. (The rapid flashing light indicates acceptance of the hand-held transmitters’ radio frequency signals.) 5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button and observe the red light. If the light is a constant red, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with step 2 in the “Programming” section — do not repeat step 1. Note: If the red light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a continuous red, proceed with steps 6 through 8 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device. 6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). 67 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls 7. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight. 8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence again, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming. HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To program additional HomeLink buttons begin with step 2 in the “Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System To operate, simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the REC DEL PLAY trained product (garage door, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, or home or office lighting etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still programming difficulties, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. Erasing HomeLink buttons To erase the three programmed buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased): REC DEL PLAY • Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the red indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with step 2 in the “Programming” section. 68 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Do NOT release the button. 2. The red indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, follow step 2 in the “Programming” section. For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. Gate Operator & Canadian Programming During programming, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting — REC DEL PLAY not allowing enough time for HomeLink to accept the signal from the hand-held transmitter. After completing steps 1 and 2 outlined in the “Programming” section, replace step 3 with the following: Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent overheating. • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button (note step 3 in the “Programming” section) while you press and release — every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has been accepted by the HomeLink. The red indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio frequency signal. • Proceed with step 4 in the “Programming” section. Operating TravelNote TravelNote records and stores messages for up to three minutes in total length with simple controls. When you get an idea or remember something important while you’re driving, you don’t have to try to scribble it down or pull off the side of the road. All you have to do is push a button and begin speaking. 69 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls To record a message: 1. Press and release the REC button one time to start recording. REC DEL PLAY (An audible tone will sound, confirming the onset of recording). 2. Press and release the REC button a second time to end recording. (An audible tone will sound again, confirming the end of recording and the red indicator light will turn off.) 3. While a message is being recorded, the indicator light will be a solid red. 4. If the message exceeds the available memory space, two tones will sound, the indicator light will flash amber and recording will end. The indicator light will flash amber and an “error” tone will sound if the REC button is pressed when memory is full. To play a message: 1. Press and release the PLAY button to play the message. REC DEL PLAY 2. Press and hold the PLAY button to hear all the messages in consecutive order starting with the most recent. 3. If the PLAY button is pressed while a message is being listened to, TravelNote will skip to the beginning of the next message. 4. During all PLAY functions, the indicator light will be a solid green. The indicator light will flash amber and an “error” tone will sound if the PLAY button is pressed but no message is currently in memory. To delete a message: 1. Press and release the DEL button while listening to a message or REC DEL PLAY shortly after. The indicator light will flash green twice. 2. To delete all recorded messages, simultaneously press and release the PLAY and REC buttons at the same time. The indicator light will flash green twice. 70 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls If the DEL button is inadvertently pressed or the time allotted (five seconds) has passed, the indicator light will flash amber and an “error” tone will sound. POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT (IF EQUIPPED) Position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over the pointed end of the retention post and rotate forward to lock in. Make sure that the mat does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator or the brake pedal. To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure. TAILGATE LOCK (IF EQUIPPED) Your vehicle may be equipped with a tailgate lock designed to prevent theft of the tailgate. • Insert ignition key and turn to the right to engage lock. • Turn ignition key to the left to unlock. 71 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls TAILGATE REMOVAL Your tailgate is removable to allow more room for loading. 1. Lower the tailgate. 2. Use a screwdriver to pry the spring clip (on each connector) past the head of the support screw. Disconnect cable. 3. Disconnect the other cable. 4. Lift tailgate to a 45 degree angle. 5. Lift right side off of its hinge. 6. Lift left side off of its hinge. To install, follow the removal procedures in reverse order. BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED) Your vehicle may be equipped with a bed extender designed to extend the pickup box for longer loads. To extend the bed extender: 1. Lower tailgate. 2. Pull the round knobs on each side of the extender to release it from the pickup box. 3. Pivot extender on to the tailgate. 4. Evenly push down on the extender and push the round knobs in on each side locking it in place. Green markings on the shaft indicate the locked position. The locking clip screws below the middle bar can be tightened counterclockwise for extra security. Note: If the red marking on the shaft is visible, the bed extender is not locked or properly secured. 72 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls To stow the bed extender, follow steps one through four in reverse order. The bed extender may be used to secure a load of up to 46 kg (100 lbs.) on the tailgate. The bed extender should always be kept in the stowed position with the tailgate closed when not in use. When driving the vehicle off road, the bed extender should be removed and the tailgate closed. To remove the bed extender: 1. Extend the bed extender. 2. Pull the round knobs on each side of the extender to unlock it. Make sure the locking clip screws are loose before removing the extender. 3. Press the locking clips below the middle bar on each side and lift the extender out of the bed. To install the bed extender, follow the removal procedure in reverse order. TONNEAU COVER (IF EQUIPPED) The tonneau cover has been designed to maximize fuel economy and should be fully installed whenever possible. The cover can be rolled up and stowed behind the cab, or removed completely from the vehicle. • To avoid damage to the cover, do not operate the vehicle unless the cover is fully installed, or securely stowed. The removal and stowage for styleside and flareside vehicles are basically the same except where noted. To remove or stow the cover: 1. Styleside only: In cold weather lower tailgate and release the levers on each side of the rear rail to release tension on the cover. 73 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls 2. Pull the rear corner assist loops of the cover, outward, then upward to release the tension. Lift up on the rear edge of the cover to remove it from the rear rail. 3. Pull one side of the cover outward and upward away from the side rail working from the rear to the front. 4. Starting from the opposite side of the vehicle, pull cover away from the side rail and roll the cover from rear to front. 5. Secure the cover behind the cab with two straps. The cover may be removed from the vehicle by sliding it sideways out of the front rail. 74 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls Flareside only: • Remove two cross bars from pickup box by pushing towards either side to release tension. • Lower tailgate, depress the levers on each side of the rear rail and remove rear rail from pickup box. Styleside only: • Remove three cross bars from pickup box by pushing towards either side to release tension. Stow the cross bars in the notches behind the rolled cover in the pickup box. • Lower tailgate, depress the levers on each side of the rear rail and push rear rail towards the front of the pickup box securing it behind the cross bars and cover. For installation of the cover, follow the removal procedure in reverse order. Make sure the crossbows are locked in the notches in the side rails and the rear rails are locked in position prior to cover installation. 75 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driver Controls HARD TONNEAU COVER (IF EQUIPPED) The tonneau cover has been designed to maximize fuel economy. • To avoid damage to the cover, do not operate the vehicle unless the cover is fully secured. To open the cover: • Unlock the cover (with the key) and lift the cover up for access to the pickup box. To close the cover: • Close the cover on pickup box. 76 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Locks and Security KEYS The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement keys are available from your dealer. You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an emergency. Refer to SecuriLock Passive Anti-Theft System for more information. POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED) If the door does not unlock when the U is pressed, see Interior power door disable feature in the Remote entry section in this chapter. Press U to unlock all doors and L to lock all doors. L U 77 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Locks and Security Childproof door locks (if equipped) When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside. The rear doors can be opened from the outside when the doors are unlocked. The childproof locks are located on rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door. Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors. Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock. Move control down to disengage childproof locks. INTERIOR TONNEAU COVER RELEASE (IF EQUIPPED) Your vehicle is equipped with a mechanical interior tonneau cover release handle that provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the pickup box. Adults are advised to familiarize themselves with the operation and location of the release handle. 78 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Locks and Security To open the tonneau cover from the inside, pull the “T” shaped handle and push up on the tonneau cover panel. The handle is composed of a material that will glow for hours in darkness following brief exposure to ambient light. The “T” shaped handle is located on the tonneau cover panel. Keep vehicle doors and tonneau cover locked and keep keys and remote transmitters out of a child’s reach. Unsupervised children could lock themselves in the box and risk injury. Children should be taught not to play in vehicles. On hot days, the temperature in the pickup box can rise very quickly. Exposure of people or animals to these high temperatures for even a short time can cause death or serious heat-related injuries, including brain damage. Small children are particularly at risk. REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 79 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Locks and Security Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to: • unlock the vehicle doors without a key. • lock all the vehicle doors without a key. • activate the personal alarm. If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle, ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the dealership, to aid in troubleshooting. Unlocking the doors 1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior lamps will illuminate. 2. Press doors. and release again within three seconds to unlock all the Locking the doors 1. Press and release to lock all the doors. The headlamps will flash. and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the 2. Press doors are closed and locked. Note: the doors will lock again, the horn will chirp once, and the headlamps will flash once more. If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick chirps and the headlamps will not flash. Power door lock disable feature (if equipped) feature on your power door locks will not work from The UNLOCK inside the vehicle when: • the ignition has been turned to the OFF position, and • 20 seconds elapse after all vehicle doors are closed and locked using the remote entry transmitter, the keyless entry pad, or the power door lock control (while the accompanying door is open). 80 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Locks and Security The UNLOCK feature will work again after: • a door has become ajar, • the ignition is turned to the ON position, or control on your remote entry transmitter or • using the UNLOCK unlocking via the keyless entry keypad. Power door lock disable feature — activation/deactivation Please see your dealer in order to activate/deactivate this feature. Sounding a panic alarm to activate the alarm. Press again or turn the ignition to ACC Press or ON to deactivate. Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the OFF position. Replacing the battery The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent. The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is approximately 10 meters (33 feet). A decrease in the operating range could be caused by: • weather conditions, • nearby radio towers, • structures around the vehicle and • other vehicles parked next to the vehicle. To replace the battery: 1. Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the remote entry transmitter near the key ring. DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF THE REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER. 81 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Locks and Security 2. Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back surface of the circuit board. 3. Remove the old battery. 4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity. 5. Snap the two halves back together. Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement. Replacing lost remote entry transmitters If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for reprogramming. How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four) available before beginning this procedure. 82 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Locks and Security To reprogram the remote entry transmitters: 4 1. Ensure the vehicle is 3 electronically unlocked. 5 2. Put the key in the ignition. 2 3. Turn the key from the 2 (LOCK) position to 3 (OFF). 1 4. Cycle, eight times, rapidly (within 10 seconds) between the 3 (OFF) position and 4 (ON). Note: The eighth turn must end in the 4 (ON) position. 5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming mode has been activated. 6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter. Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the procedure over again. 7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry transmitter has been programmed. 8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter. 9. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position after you have finished programming all of the remote entry transmitters. Note: After 20 seconds have passed, you will automatically exit the programming mode. 10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming mode has been exited. Illuminated entry The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm. The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if: • the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or • the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad, • the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or • after 25 seconds of illumination. The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the OFF position for the illuminated entry system to operate. 83 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Locks and Security The inside lights will not turn off if: • they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or • any door is open. The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the last door is closed, even if the dimmer control is on. Autolock (if equipped) This feature will automatically lock all the doors when: • all the doors are closed, • the ignition key is in the ON position, • the gearshift lever is shifted into R reverse or a forward gear and • the brake pedal is released. This feature will also automatically relock all the doors when: • the ignition is running and any door is opened then closed, and • you put the vehicle in motion by releasing the brake pedal. Deactivating/activating the autolock feature Before following the procedure, make sure that the ignition is OFF and all vehicle doors are closed. You must complete steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must wait 30 seconds. 1. Turn the ignition key to ON. 2. Press the power door unlock control three times. 3. Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. 4. Press the power door unlock control three times. 5. Turn the ignition back to ON. The horn will chirp. 6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was activated. 7. Turn the ignition to OFF. The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete. 84 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Locks and Security KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) You can use the keyless entry keypad to: • lock or unlock the doors without using a key. • activate or deactivate the autolock feature. The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5–digit entry code; this code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box, is marked on the computer module, and is available from your authorized dealer. You can also create your own 5–digit personal entry code. When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the controls to ensure a good activation. Programming a personal entry code To create your own personal entry code: 1. Enter the factory set code. 2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad. 3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other. 4. The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm that your personal keycode has been programmed to the module. Tips: • Do not set a code that uses five of the same number. • Do not use five numbers in sequential order. • The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code. • If you set a second personal code it will erase your first personal code. Erasing personal code 1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code. 2. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within five seconds of completing step 1. Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code will work. Anti-scan feature If an incorrect code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash during this time. 85 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Locks and Security The anti-scan feature will turn off after: • one minute of keypad inactivity. • pressing the control on the remote entry transmitter. • the ignition is turned to the ON position. Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each other. The interior lamps will illuminate after pressing the first control on the keypad. To unlock all doors, press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds. To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time. You do not need to enter the keypad code first. Note: The interior lamps will turn off. Activating/deactivating autolock with the keyless entry system Before following the activation or deactivation procedures, make sure that the anti-theft system (if equipped) is not armed, the ignition is off, and all vehicle doors are closed. 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all vehicle doors. 3. Enter the five-digit entry code. 4. Press and hold the 7 • 8 control. While holding the 7 • 8 control, press and hold the 3 • 4 control. 5. Release the 3 • 4 control. 6. Release the 7 • 8 control. The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was activated. To re-activate autolock, repeat steps 1–6. SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization system. This system is designed to prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition. Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be purchased from your dealer. The dealer can program your spare keys to 86 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Locks and Security your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key. Note: The SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection. Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine. Theft indicator The theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster. • When the ignition is in the OFF position, the indicator will flash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent. • When the ignition is in the ON position, the indicator will glow for 3 seconds, then turn off, to indicate normal system functionality. If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system, the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the ON position. If this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for service. Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position. The THEFT indicator will flash every two seconds when the vehicle is armed. 4 3 5 2 1 Automatic disarming Switching the ignition to the 4 (ON) position with a coded key disarms the vehicle. 87 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Locks and Security • The THEFT indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. • If the THEFT indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your dealer. Replacement keys If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle towed to a dealership. The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed. Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys. Programming spare keys You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle. Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin. Tips: • A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. • Only use Securilock keys. • You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily accessible. • If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must take your vehicle to your dealer to have the spare key(s) programmed. 1. Insert a previously programmed coded key into the ignition. 4 3 5 2 1 2. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position. Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second, but no more than 10 seconds. 88 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Locks and Security 3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position. 4. Remove the previously programmed coded key from the ignition. 5. Within ten seconds of removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the other previously programmed coded key into the ignition. 6. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position. Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second but not more than 10 seconds. 7. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position. 8. Remove the previously programmed coded key from the ignition. 9. Within twenty seconds of removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the unprogrammed key (new/valet key) into the ignition. 10. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position. Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second, but no more than 10 seconds. 11. Your new, unprogrammed key is now programmed. If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off, or stay on for more than three seconds. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealer to have the new key(s) programmed. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure from step 1 for each additional key. 89 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING Notes: Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop. Adjustable head restraints (if equipped) Head restraints help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision. Adjust your head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible behind your head. The head restraints can be moved up and down. Push control to lower head restraint. 90 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Full bench seat (if equipped) • Lift the release bar to move the seat forward or backward. Ensure that the seat is relatched into place. • Pull up on the lever located at the bottom of the seatback to quickly fold the seatback forward. 60/40 split bench seat (if equipped) • Lift the release bar to move the seat forward or backward. Ensure the seat is relatched into place. • Pull the seatback handle up to move the seat back forward or backward. • Push down the release lever (if equipped) located on the back of the seat to quickly fold the seatback forward. 91 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Captain’s chair (if equipped) • Lift the track release bar to move the seat forward or rearward. Make sure that the seat is relatched into place. • Pull the release lever handle located on the side of the seat up to move the seat back forward or backward. • Push down the release lever (if equipped) located at the bottom of the seatback to quickly fold the seatback forward. Using the manual lumbar support For more lumbar support, turn the lumbar support control toward the front of vehicle. For less lumbar support, turn the lumbar support control toward the rear of vehicle. Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped) The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion. Your vehicle will only be equipped with one of the two controls shown. 92 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Press to raise or lower the front portion of the seat cushion. • Type A • Type B Press to raise or lower the rear portion of the seat cushion. • Type A • Type B 93 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Press the control to move the seat forward, backward, up or down. • Type A • Type B Heated seats (if equipped) To operate the heated seats: • Push control located on the side of the seat to activate. • Push again to deactivate. The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated. REAR SEATS Folding up the rear seats (if equipped — SuperCab only) The rear seatback has a split 60/40 seat. Each seat cushion can be flipped up into the seatback position. 1. Pull control to release seat cushion. 2. Rotate seat cushion up until it locks into vertical storage position. 94 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Returning the seat to seating position Always be sure that the seat is in a latched position, whether the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop. 1. Pull control on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from storage position. 2. Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position. Folding down the rear seats (SuperCrew only) The rear seatback has a split 60/40 seat. Each seat can be folded down into the load floor position. 1. Remove the head restraint. Push the release button at the base of the head restraint post and pull the head restraint up and out. 2. Pull control to release seat. 95 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints 3. Pull seatback toward front seat and down into load floor position. 4. Make sure seat is pushed all the way down and locks into position. Returning the seat to seating position Always be sure that the seat is in a latched position, whether the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop. 1. Pull control on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from the load floor position. 96 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints 2. Lift seatback up until it locks into vertical position. 3. Return the head restraint to its original position. If the head restraint is inserted backwards, it may lock and not be removable by using the release button. If this happens use a stiff piece of wire such as a paper clip, and insert the wire into the hole on the opposite side of the release button. Depress the release button and remove the head restraint. Using the armrest (if equipped) Push the release control to move the armrest up or down. 97 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints SAFETY RESTRAINTS Safety restraints precautions Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is provided. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt. Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person. Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints. 98 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them. Combination lap and shoulder belts 1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. • Front seats • Rear seats (if equipped) 2. To unfasten, push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle. 99 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints • Front seats • Rear seats (if equipped) The front and rear outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The front passenger and rear seat outboard safety belts have two types of locking modes described below: Vehicle sensitive mode The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode, allowing free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers. The front seat belt system can also be made to lock manually by quickly pulling on the shoulder belt. Rear seat belts (if equipped) cannot be made to lock up by pulling quickly on the belt. Automatic locking mode In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt. 100 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints When to use the automatic locking mode • Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front or outboard rear seating position with Regular Cab or SuperCab. SuperCrew models include the center seating position of the second row. Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for Children later in this chapter. How to use the automatic locking mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. • Front seats • Rear seats (if equipped) 101 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted. 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. How to disengage the automatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. After any vehicle collision, the safety belt systems at all outboard seating positions (except the driver position, which does not have this feature) must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for proper function. BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions. The Seat Integrated Restraints (SIR) seat (which has shoulder belts attached to the corners of the front seat back) is equipped with a buckle pretensioner. Do NOT place objects between the seats, this could interfere with the functioning of the pretensioner. For the SuperCab and 102 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints CrewCab base bench seats and all Regular Cab seating positions, the safety belts are equipped with a retractor pretensioner. The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate only during certain frontal or near-frontal collisions with sufficient longitudinal deceleration. A safety belt pretensioner is a device which tightens the webbing of the lap and shoulder belts during some collisions in such a way that they fit more snugly against the body. The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt pretensioners. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter. Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. Front safety belt height adjustment (if equipped) If your shoulder belts come out of the front seat back, you will not have a safety belt height adjuster. Regular Cab and SuperCab vehicles have safety belt height adjustments for the driver and front passenger. SuperCrew vehicles have these adjustments for the driver, front passenger and rear outboard passengers. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. • Regular Cab/4–door SuperCrew 103 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints • 4–door SuperCab (Bench seats only) To lower the shoulder belt height, push the button and slide the height adjuster down. To raise the height of the shoulder belt, slide the height adjuster up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place. Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision. Lap belts Adjusting the lap belt The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips, not across the waist. The center lap belt tongues are designed to fit only in the correct buckle. The tongue will not securely latch if you attempt to use it in any of the outboard seating position buckles. To ensure that you have used the correct buckle you should hear a snap and feel it latch. • 1st row center and 2nd row center (SuperCab) seating position The lap belt does not adjust automatically. 104 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Insert the tongue into the correct buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from). To lengthen the belt, turn the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull across your lap until it reaches the buckle. To tighten the belt, pull the loose end of the belt through the tongue until it fits snugly across the hips. Shorten and fasten the belt when not in use. • 2nd row center seating position (SuperCrew) The lap belt will adjust automatically. To fasten, grasp the tongue, and with a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing to buckle the tongue into the correct buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from). If you did not pull out enough webbing to reach the buckle, allow the tongue to retract fully before trying to pull it out again. The belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around your hips. Do not wear the lap belt around your waist. Safety belt warning light and indicator chime The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts. 105 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Conditions of operation If. The driver’s safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding. The driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. BeltMinder (if equipped) The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. If. The driver’s safety belt is not buckled approximately 5 seconds after the safety belt warning light has turned off. Then. The BeltMinder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds, repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until safety belt is buckled. The BeltMinder feature will not activate. Then. The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds. The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off. The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off. The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the safety belt indicator light is illuminated and the safety belt warning chime is sounding. 106 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints If. The driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. Then. The BeltMinder feature will not activate. The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts: (All statistics based on U.S. data) Reasons given. “Crashes are rare events” Consider. 36700 crashes occur every day. The more we drive, the more we are exposed to “rare” events, even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime. 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home. We design our safety belts to enhance comfort. If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible; this can improve comfort. Prime time for an accident. BeltMinder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up. Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars, and by 60% in light trucks. Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle crashes, many when no other vehicles are around. Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are unbelted. 107 “I’m not going far” “Belts are uncomfortable” “I was in a hurry” “Safety belts don’t work” “Traffic is light” “Belts wrinkle my clothes” 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Reasons given. “The people I’m with don’t wear belts” Consider. Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people. Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate behavior they see. Air bags offer greater protection when used with safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers. Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”. “I have an air bag” “I’d rather be thrown clear” Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt Minder feature please follow the directions stated below. One time disable Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an ignition ON cycle, the BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle only. Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation/activation programming procedure. The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure: Before following the procedure, ensure that the following conditions are met: • The parking brake is set. • The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral position (manual transmission). • The ignition switch is in the OFF position. 108 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints • All vehicle doors are closed. • The driver’s safety belt is unbuckled. • The parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure). To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle. BeltMinder activation and deactivation procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT START THE ENGINE.) 2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2 minutes.) • Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated. 3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during BeltMinder warning activation. 4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps. 5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the safety belt unbuckled. • After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds. 6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. • This will disable BeltMinder if it is currently enabled, or enable BeltMinder if it is currently disabled. 7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder is provided by the safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds. 8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder is provided by: • The safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds. • Followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off. • Once again, the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds. 9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete. 109 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 20 cm (8 inch) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number 611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost. Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Safety belt maintenance Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision. Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter. 110 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Important SRS precautions The SRS is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries. Air bags DO NOT inflate slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying air bag. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is provided. Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat if your vehicle has a back seat. If a child in a rear facing infant seat must be transported in front, the passenger air bag must be turned OFF. This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating air bag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the air bag inflates is substantial. 111 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module. Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries. To properly position yourself away from the air bag: • Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably. • Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position. Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing serious injury. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. The front passenger air bag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center front seating position. Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the air bag system, increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle. Additional equipment may affect the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment. Children and air bags For additional important safety information, read all information on safety restraints in this guide. 112 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Children must always be properly restrained. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision. An infant in a rear-facing seat faces a high risk of serious or fatal injuries from a deploying passenger air bag. Rear facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats, unless the passenger air bag is turned off. See Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch. How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work? The air bag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration. The fact that the air bags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Air bags are designed to inflate in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts. The air bags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After air bag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (e.g. baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the air bag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or 113 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of air bag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control. Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation. If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision. The SRS consists of: • driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and air bags), • one or more impact and safing sensors, passenger air bag deactivation switch and diagnostic monitor (RCM) • a readiness light and tone, • and the electrical wiring which connects the components. The RCM (restraints control module) monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental air bag electrical system warning (including the passenger air bag deactivation switch, the impact sensors, the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air bag back up power and the air bag ignitors). Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster and the passenger air bag deactivate switch or a tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness section in the Instrument cluster chapter or Passenger air bag on/off switch section in this chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is not required. 114 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: • The readiness lights will either flash or stay lit. • The readiness lights will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on. • A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired. If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision. Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles (including pretensioners) See your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel. Passenger air bag ON/OFF switch (if equipped) An air bag ON/OFF switch has been installed in this vehicle. Before driving, always look at the face of the switch to be sure the switch is in the proper position in accordance with these instructions and warnings. Failure to put the switch in a proper position can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF OFF ON 115 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Turning the passenger air bag off 1. Insert the ignition key, turn the switch to OFF position and hold in OFF position while removing the key. 2. When the ignition is turned to the ON position the OFF light illuminates briefly, momentarily shuts off and then turns back on. This indicates that the passenger air bag is deactivated. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF OFF ON If the OFF light fails to illuminate when the passenger airbag ON/OFF switch is in the OFF position and the ignition switch is in ON, have the passenger airbag ON/OFF switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. In order to avoid inadvertent activation of the switch, always remove the ignition key from the passenger air bag ON/OFF switch. 116 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Turning the passenger air bag back on The passenger air bag remains OFF until you turn it back ON. 1. Insert the ignition key and turn the switch to ON. 2. The OFF light will briefly illuminate when the ignition is turned to ON. This indicates that the passenger air bag is operational. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF OFF ON If the OFF light is illuminated when the passenger air bag ON/OFF switch is in the ON position and the ignition switch is ON, have the passenger air bag ON/OFF switch serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer immediately. The passenger side air bag should always be ON (the air bag OFF light should not be illuminated) unless the passenger is a person who meets the requirements stated either in Category 1, 2 or 3 of the NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation criteria which follows. The safety belts for the driver and right front passenger seating positions have been specifically designed to function together with the air bags in certain types of crashes. When you turn OFF your air bag, you not only lose the protection of the air bag, you also may reduce the effectiveness of your safety belt system, which was designed to work with the air bag. If you are not a person who meets the requirements stated in the NHTSA/Transport Canada deactivation criteria turning OFF the air bag can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. 117 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Always transport children who are 12 and younger in the rear seat. Always use safety belts and child restraints properly. If a child in a rear facing infant seat must be transported in front, the passenger air bag must be turned OFF. This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating air bag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the air bag inflates is substantial. The vast majority of drivers and passengers are much safer with an air bag than without. To do their job and reduce the risk of life threatening injuries, air bags must open with great force, and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk in some situations, particularly when a front seat occupant is not properly buckled up. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary air bag injuries without reducing the overall safety of the vehicle is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained in the vehicle, especially in the front seat. This provides the protection of safety belts and permits the air bags to provide the additional protection they were designed to provide. If you choose to deactivate your air bag, you are losing the very significant risk-reducing benefits of the air bag and you are also reducing the effectiveness of the safety belts, because safety belts in modern vehicles are designed to work as a safety system with the air bags. Read all air bag Warning labels in the vehicle as well as the other important air bag instructions and Warnings in this Owner’s Guide. NHTSA deactivation criteria (excluding Canada) 1. Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because: • the vehicle has no rear seat; • the vehicle has a rear seat too small to accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or • the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition. 2. Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must ride in the front seat because: • the vehicle has no rear seat; • although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front because no space is available in the rear seat(s) of the vehicle; or 118 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints • the child has a medical condition which, according to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can constantly monitor the child’s condition. 3. Medical condition. A passenger has a medical condition which, according to his or her physician: • causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk for the passenger; and • makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag in a crash greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the air bag and allowing the passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or windshield in a crash. Transport Canada deactivation criteria (Canada Only) 1. Infant: An infant (less than 1 year old) must ride in the front seat because: • my vehicle has no rear seat; • the rear seat in my vehicle cannot accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or • the infant has a medical condition which, according to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the infant’s condition. 2. Child age 12 or under: A child age 12 or under must ride in the front seat because: • my vehicle has no rear seat; • although children age 12 and under ride in the rear seat whenever possible, children age 12 and under have no option but to sometimes ride in the front seat because rear seat space is insufficient; or • the child has a medical condition that, according to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can monitor the child’s condition. 3. Medical condition: A passenger has a medical condition that, according to his or her physician: • poses a special risk for the passenger if the air bag deploys; and • makes the potential harm from the passenger air bag deployment greater than the potential harm from turning OFF the air bag and experiencing a crash without the protection offered by the air bag SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags. 119 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Important child restraint precautions You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S. and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] or less) ride in your vehicle, you must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision. Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or child restraint you might use. Children and safety belts If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts. Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle. If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in your vehicle. Child booster seats Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh 40 pounds and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious injury. To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt-positioning booster. 120 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably for growing children. When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about 80 lbs (about 8 to 12 years old). Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions: • Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat without slouching? • Does the lap belt rest low across the hips? • Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest? • Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Types of booster seats There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats: • Those that are backless. If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield and use the lap/shoulder belt. If a seating position has a low seat back and no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child’s head (top of ear level) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts. 121 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints • Those with a high back. If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be a better choice. Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lbs. The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips, never up high across the stomach. If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition. The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children to ride. Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat. Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision. Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision. 122 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Child and infant or child safety seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. When installing a child safety seat: • Review and follow the information presented in the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System section in this chapter. • Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from). • Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. • Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling. • Place seat back in upright position. • Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating 123 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints positions-Regular Cab and SuperCab) (passenger side front and rear seating positions-SuperCrew) (if equipped). Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether straps, refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision. Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back. Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. 1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt. 124 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints 2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together. 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. 125 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints 5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out and a click is heard. 6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Pull the lap belt portion across the child seat toward the buckle and pull up on the shoulder belt while pushing down with your knee on the child seat. 8. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt. 9. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward. There should be no more than one inch of movement for proper installation. 10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps two through nine. Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use. 126 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Installing child safety seats in the front row lap belt seating positions 1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt, hold the tongue so that its bottom is perpendicular to the direction of webbing while sliding the tongue up the webbing. 2. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position. 3. Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on tongue. 5. Push down on the child seat while pulling on the loose end of the lap belt webbing to tighten the belt. 6. Before placing the child into the child seat, forcibly tilt the child seat from side to side and in forward direction to make sure that the seat is held securely in place. If the child seat moves excessively, repeat steps 5 through 6, or properly install the child seat in a different position. Installing child safety seat in the second row center seating position with an automatic locking retractor 1. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position. 2. In a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing from the retractor to route the tongue through the child seat. 3. While holding the webbing to prevent it from retracting, route the webbing through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. 4. Insert the tongue into the correct buckle for that seating position until you hear and feel the buckle engage. Make sure the buckle is latched securely by pulling on the webbing. 5. If you have not pulled out enough webbing to reach, allow the webbing to fully retract before attempting to pull it out again and repeat steps 2 through 4. 6. Pull the webbing through the child seat toward the retractor while pushing down with your knee on the child seat. 7. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt. It will make a clicking noise while doing this. 127 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints 8. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly move the seat forward and side-to-side to make sure the seat is securely held in place. 9. Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use. Attaching child safety seats with tether straps Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap. The passenger seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below. The tether anchors in your vehicle may be straps on the seatback or an anchor bracket on the rear edge of the seat cushion. The rear seat of the SuperCab has three straps behind the top of the seatback that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor loops. The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions (shown from top view): Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor. • F150 Regular Cab 128 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints • F150 SuperCab • F150 SuperCrew • F150 SuperCrew with quad buckets Tether strap attachment 1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion. 2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat. 3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position. • You may need to pull the seatback forward to access the tether anchors. Make sure the seatback is locked in the upright position before installing the child seat. Refer to the Folding Down The Rear Seats section in this chapter for information on how to operate the rear seats. 4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown. 129 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints • Front seat (Regular Cab and SuperCab only) • Rear seats ( with quad buckets only) 130 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints • Rear seats (SuperCrew only) If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision. 5. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further instructions to secure the child safety seat. 6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases. Tether strap attachment rear SuperCab only There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat (along the bottom edge of the rear window) in the SuperCab. These loops are to be used as both routing loops and anchor loops for child safety seat tether straps. For example, the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child seats installed in the outboard rear seats. 131 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to the loop directly behind the child seat. To provide a tight tether strap: 1. Route the tether strap through the loop directly behind the child seat. 2. Attach the strap hook onto the loop behind an adjacent seating position. 3. Install the child safety seat tightly using the safety belts. Follow the instructions in this chapter. 4. Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. 132 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) attachments for child seat anchors (if equipped) Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also be attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter. Your vehicle may be equipped with LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the following seating positions: • F150 Regular Cab • F150 Supercab • F150 SuperCrew 133 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints • F150 SuperCrew with Quad Buckets The anchors on both sides of the center of the SuperCrew rear seat are provided only for child seats at the outboard seats. These anchors are further apart than the pairs of lower anchors for child seat installation at other seats. DO NOT install child seats with LATCH attachments (rigid or mounted on belt webbing) to the lower anchors at the center rear seat. If you install a child seat at the center rear position, use the vehicle lap belt and the top tether anchor. Connectors on the LATCH child seat and the child seat instructions may use the symbol shown here. Your vehicle seat may have plain buttons, instead of this symbol, to indicate the location of the LATCH lower anchors. Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. The lower anchors for child seat installation are located at the rear section of the seat between the cushion and seat back. The LATCH anchors are below the locator buttons (if provided) on the seat back. Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments. Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown. 134 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Seating and Safety Restraints If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash. Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to tilt the child seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place. If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases. 135 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running. 2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel, automatic transmission gearshift lever and allows key removal. For vehicle equipped with a manual transmission, you must depress the ignition release lever to release the key. 3 2 1 4 5 3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all accessories without locking the steering wheel. This position also allows the automatic transmission shift lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal being depressed. When the key is in the ignition OFF position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking brake. 4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key position when driving. 5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine starts. Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise. When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter. 136 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage. Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Important safety precautions When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle checked. Before starting the vehicle: 1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. 2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission: 137 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving • Make sure the parking brake is set. • Make sure the gearshift is in P (Park). If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission: 1. Make sure the parking brake is set. 2. Push the clutch pedal to the floor. 138 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving • Turn the key to 4 (ON) without turning the key to 5 (START). 4 3 5 2 1 139 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced. • If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the Starting the engine 1. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without turning the key to 5 (START). If there is difficulty in turning the key, rotate the steering wheel until the key turns freely. 2. Turn the key to 5 (START), then release the key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter. light may not illuminate. 4 3 5 2 1 Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel. Using the engine block heater (if equipped) An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and heater/defroster performance. Use of an engine block heater is strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach -23° C (-10° F) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle. The heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle. 140 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects. If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes. Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time, open the windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch) or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air. BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician. Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS) Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking; this is normal and should be no reason for concern. Using ABS When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance. ABS warning lamp ABS The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned to ON. If the light does not illuminate during start up, remains on or flashes, the ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced. 141 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Even when the ABS is disabled, normal braking is still effective. (If your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake released, have your brake system serviced immediately.) Parking brake To set the parking brake (1), press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops. HOOD. BRAKE BRAKE 2 1 The BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate and will remain illuminated until the parking brake is released. To release, pull the lever (2). Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission). STEERING To prevent damage to the power steering system: • Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running. • Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level (below the MIN mark on the reservoir). 142 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort. If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: • an improperly inflated tire • uneven tire wear • loose or worn suspension components • loose or worn steering components • improper steering alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander/pull. TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED) This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt. Your vehicle has larger tires and increased ground clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. 143 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) Brake-shift interlock This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed. If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed: 1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the key. 2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift to N (Neutral). When the key is in the ignition OFF position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking brake. 3. Start the vehicle. If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever, it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside emergencies chapter. Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. 144 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your dealer or a qualified service technician. Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic transmission P (Park) This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning. To put your vehicle in gear: • Start the engine • Depress the brake pedal • Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P (Park): • Come to a complete stop • Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park) Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. R (Reverse) With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse). N (Neutral) With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position. 145 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving (Overdrive) The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission operates in gears one through four. Overdrive can be deactivated by pressing the transmission control switch on the end of the gearshift lever. This transmission control indicator light (TCIL) will illuminate on the end of the gearshift. OVERDRIVE OFF OVERDRIVE Drive (not shown) Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed. • This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive. • O/D OFF lamp is illuminated. • Provides engine braking. • Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer towing and when engine braking is required. • To return to O/D (Overdrive), press the transmission control switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated. • O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned off. 2 (Second) This position allows for second gear only. • Provides engine braking. • Use to start-up on slippery roads. (Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the • To return to (Overdrive) position. • Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed. 146 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving 1 (First) • Provides maximum engine braking. • Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever. • Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First) when vehicle reaches slower speeds. Forced downshifts • Allowed in (Overdrive) or Drive. • Depress the accelerator to the floor. • Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear. Shift strategy (4R100 automatic transmission) To account for customer driving habits and conditions, your 4R100 automatic transmission electronically controls the shift quality by using an adaptive learning strategy. The adaptive learning strategy is maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. Optimal shifting will resume within a few hundred kilometers (miles) of operation. If the shift quality does not improve within a few hundred kilometers (miles) of operation, or if the downshifts and other throttle conditions do not function normally, see your dealer or a qualified service technician as soon as possible. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat. 147 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) 1 2 3 4 5 R Using the clutch The manual transmission has a starter interlock that prevents cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. To start the vehicle: 1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set. 2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the neutral position. 3. Start the engine, then press the brake pedal and release the parking brake. 4. Move the gearshift lever to the desired gear, then slowly release the clutch pedal while slowly pressing on the accelerator. During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor. Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause increased shift efforts and prematurely wear components in the transmission. Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t interfere with the full extension of the clutch pedal. Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These actions will reduce the life of the clutch. Recommended shift speeds Upshift and downshift according to the following charts for your specific engine/drivetrain combination: 148 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving 4.2L V6 engine Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy) Shift from: Transfer case position (if equipped) 2H or 4H 4L 1-2 24 km/h (15 mph) 14 km/h (9 mph) 2-3 40 km/h (25 mph) 19 km/h (12 mph) 3-4 60 km/h (37 mph) 24 km/h (15 mph) 72 km/h (45 mph) 29 km/h (18 mph) 4 - D (Overdrive) Upshifts when cruising (recommended for best fuel economy) Shift from: Transfer case position (if equipped) 2H or 4H 4L 1-2 18 km/h (11 mph) 8 km/h (5 mph) 2-3 34 km/h (21 mph) 18 km/h (11 mph) 3-4 50 km/h (31 mph) 23 km/h (14 mph) 69 km/h (43 mph) 27 km/h (17 mph) 4 - D (Overdrive) 4.6L V8 engine (4x2 and 4x4 with 3.08:1 rear axle ratio) Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy) Shift from: Transfer case position (if equipped) 2H or 4H 4L 1-2 24 km/h (15 mph) 14 km/h (9 mph) 2-3 40 km/h (25 mph) 19 km/h (12 mph) 3-4 58 km/h (36 mph) 23 km/h (14 mph) 72 km/h (45 mph) 27 km/h (17 mph) 4 D (Overdrive) - 149 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Upshifts when cruising (recommended for best fuel economy) Shift from: Transfer case position (if equipped) 2H or 4H 4L 1-2 16 km/h (10 mph) 6 km/h (4 mph) 2-3 34 km/h (21 mph) 16 km/h (10 mph) 3-4 51 km/h (32 mph) 21 km/h (13 mph) 72 km/h (45 mph) 27 km/h (17 mph) 4 D (Overdrive) 4.6L V8 engine (4x2 with optional rear axle ratio) Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy) Shift from: Transfer case position (if equipped) 2H or 4H 4L 1-2 14 km/h (9 mph) 5 km/h (3 mph) 2-3 32 km/h (20 mph) 11 km/h (7 mph) 3-4 50 km/h (31 mph) 19 km/h (12 mph) 71 km/h (44 mph) 27 km/h (17 mph) 4 - D (Overdrive) Upshifts when cruising (recommended for best fuel economy) Shift from: Transfer case position (if equipped) 2H or 4H 4L 1-2 16 km/h (10 mph) 6 km/h (4 mph) 2-3 26 km/h (16 mph) 10 km/h (6 mph) 3-4 43 km/h (27 mph) 16 km/h (10 mph) 68 km/h (42 mph) 26 km/h (16 mph) 4 - D (Overdrive) 150 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving All applications Maximum downshift speeds1 Shift from: Transfer case position (if equipped) 2H or 4H 4L 89 km/h (55 mph) 34 km/h (21 mph) D (Overdrive) 4 4-3 72 km/h (45 mph) 27 km/h (17 mph) 3-2 56 km/h (35 mph) 21 km/h (13 mph) 2-1 32 km/h (20 mph) 11 km/h (7 mph) 1 Downshift at lower speeds when driving on slippery surfaces. Reverse 1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission. 2. Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse). • The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving it from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse). This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from accidentally being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Overdrive). Parking your vehicle 1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position. 2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First). 3. Turn the ignition off. Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake fully. Removing the key Turn the ignition off, push the release lever (located above the ignition), then turn the key toward you and remove the key. 151 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED) For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter. Four–wheel drive (4WD) supplies power to all four wheels. 4WD should not be operated on dry pavement; driveline damage may occur. If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low is selected while the vehicle is moving, the 4WD system will not engage. This is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4WD Low for proper operation. 4WD system indicator lights • 4X4 - Momentarily illuminates when the vehicle is started. Illuminates when 4WD Low or 4WD High is selected. • LOW RANGE - Momentarily illuminates when the vehicle is started. Illuminates when 4WD Low is selected. Using a manual 4WD system (if equipped) 4x4 2H 4H N 4L 2H (2WD High) – Power to the rear wheels only; used for street and highway driving. Provides optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high speeds. 4H (4WD High) – Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads or in off-road situations. Not intended for use on dry pavement. N (Neutral) – No power to either front or rear wheels. 152 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving 4L (4WD Low)– Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off-road applications such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4WD Low) will not engage while the vehicle is moving; this is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low) for proper operation. Shifting between 2H (2WD high) and 4H (4WD high) • Move the transfer case lever between 2H (2WD High) and 4H (4WD High) at a stop or any forward speed up to 88 km/h (55 mph). Note: Do not perform this operation at speeds above 72 km/h (45 mph) if the outside temperature is below 0°C (32°F). Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping. Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is normal. Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low) 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Depress the brake. 3. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, place the transmission in N (Neutral); on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, depress the clutch. 4. Move the transfer case lever through N (Neutral) directly to the desired position. The LOW RANGE indicator will illuminate once the transfer case has engaged. • If the transfer case does not engage, repeat steps 1 through 4. Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is normal. Using the N (Neutral) position The transfer case N (Neutral) position overrides the transmission and puts the vehicle in neutral regardless of transmission gearshift lever position. The vehicle can move forward or backward. This position should only be used when towing the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. 153 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped) 4H 2H 4L 2H (2WD High) - Power to the rear wheels only; used for street and highway driving. Provides optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high speeds. 4H (4WD High) - Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads or in off-road situations. Not intended for use on dry pavement. 4L (4WD Low) - Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all four wheels at reduced speeds. Intended only for off-road applications such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4WD Low) will not engage while the vehicle is moving; this is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low) for proper operation. Shifting between 2H (2WD High) and 4H (4WD High) • Move the 4WD control between 2H and 4H at any forward speed up to 88 km/h (55 mph). Note: Do not perform this operation at speeds above 72 km/h (45 mph) if the outside temperature is below 0°C (32°F). Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping. Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is normal. Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low) 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. Depress the brake. 3. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, place the transmission in N (Neutral); on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, depress the clutch. 4. Move the 4WD control to the desired position. 154 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving • If shifting into 4L (4WD Low), wait for the LOW RANGE light in the instrument cluster to turn on indicating the shift is complete. • If shifting out of 4L (4WD Low), wait for the LOW RANGE light in the instrument cluster turn off indicating the shift is complete. Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages; this is normal. Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles 4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road. How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car. Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain. Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes. Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps. You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning. Basic operating principles • Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components. 4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces. • Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle. • Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice. If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement • If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the 155 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface. • It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly. • It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern. Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If your vehicle gets stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear. Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat. Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle. If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your dealer or a qualified service technician. 156 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Do not spin the wheels at over 56 km/h (35 mph). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. Emergency maneuvers • In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e. turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel. • In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements. Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. • If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e. from concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again, avoid these abrupt inputs. Parking On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral) position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P (Park) or the manual transmission is in gear. Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle. 157 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving 4WD Systems 4WD (when you select a 4WD mode) uses all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot. Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On 4WD vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in the Driving chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle. Normal characteristics On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern. Sand When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels. If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible. Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution. 158 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Mud and water If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited. When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall. Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle. If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary. Driving through deep water may damage the transmission. If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should be replaced. After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components. “Tread Lightly” is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land-use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by “treading lightly.” Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep 159 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer. When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling. If you do stall out, do not try to turn around because you might roll over. It is better to back down to a safe location. Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating. Do not descend in neutral; instead, disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear. When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control. When you brake hard, the front wheels can’t turn and if they aren’t turning, you won’t be able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle and still maintain steering control. If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Driving on snow and ice 4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle. Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control. 160 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop. Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not become overconfident as to road conditions. Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the wheels. Use a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you lock the wheels, release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique. If your vehicle is equipped with a Four Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), apply the brake steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock brake system. Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and swing around during braking. Tires, Replacement Requirements Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel other than that originally provided by Ford Motor Company because it can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, and/or serious personal injury or death. Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type, tread design, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer. If you nevertheless decide to equip your 4WD for off-road use with tires larger than what Ford Motor Company recommends, you should not use these tires for highway driving. If you use any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Ford Motor Company, it may adversely affect vehicle handling and could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case failure as well as the increased risk of loss of vehicle control. 161 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Do not use “aftermarket lift kits” or other suspension modifications, whether or not they are used with larger tires and wheels. These “aftermarket lift kits” could adversely affect the vehicle’s handling characteristics, which could lead to loss of vehicle control or rollover and serious injury. Tires can be damaged during off-road use. For your safety, tires that are damaged should not be used for highway driving because they are more likely to blow out or fail. You should carefully observe the recommended tire inflation pressure found on the safety compliance certification label attached to the left front door lock facing or door latch post pillar. Failure to follow tire pressure recommendations can adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. Do not exceed the Ford Motor Company recommended pressure even if it is less than the maximum pressure allowed for the tire. Each day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires, and adjust if required. Check tire pressure with a tire gauge every few weeks (including spare). Safe operation requires tires that are neither underinflated nor a vehicle which is overloaded. Periodically inspect the tire treads and remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary repairs. Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment. Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control. 162 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box cover). Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to heavy off-road usage. DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very slowly especially if the depth is not known. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). Traction or brake capability may be limited and your vehicle may stall. Water may also enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine. Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage. VEHICLE LOADING Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms: • Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle including any standard equipment, fluids, lubricants, etc. It does not include occupants or aftermarket equipment. • Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of cargo, occupants and optional equipment. The payload equals the gross vehicle weight rating minus base curb weight. • GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight plus payload weight. • GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Maximum allowable total weight of the base vehicle, occupants, optional equipment and cargo. The GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar. • GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying capacity for each axle system. The GAWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar. 163 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving • GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The combined weight of the towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer. • GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Maximum allowable combined weight of towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer. • Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum weight of a trailer the vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each engine/transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. • Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a trailer the loaded vehicle (including occupants and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer towing vehicle from the GCWR for the towing vehicle. • Trailer Weight Range: Specified range of trailer weight from zero to the maximum trailer weight rating. Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when figuring the total weight. The Safety Certification Label, located on the driver’s door pillar, lists vehicle weight rating limitations. Before adding any additional equipment, refer to these limitations. Always ensure that the weight of occupants, cargo and equipment is within the weight limitations, including both gross vehicle weight and front and rear gross axle weight rating limits. Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, and/or personal injury. Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations. 164 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and utility-type vehicles For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in this chapter. Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle. Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow 1. Use the appropriate maximum GCWR chart (in the Trailer Towing section in this chapter) for your type of engine and rear axle ratio. 2. Weigh your vehicle without cargo. To obtain correct weights, take your vehicle to a shipping company or an inspection station for trucks. 3. Subtract your loaded weight from the maximum GCWR in the chart. This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow. It must be below the maximum trailer weight shown in the chart. TRAILER TOWING Your vehicle may tow a class I, II or III trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts. Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle. Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components carefully periodically during, and after any towing operation. Exceeding the maximum GCWR could result in extensive damage to your vehicle and personal injury. Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. 165 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury. Engine Maximum trailer weight-kg (lbs.) Regular Cab 4x2 w/automatic transmission 4.2L 3.31 4077 (9000) 2132 (4700) 4.2L 3.55 4530 (10000) 2585 (5700) 4.6L 3.08 4530 (10000) 907 (2000) 4.6L 3.31 4763 (10500) 2812 (6200) 4.6L 3.55 5209 (11500) 3261 (7200) 5.4L 3.31 5443 (12000) 3447 (7600) 5.4L 3.55 5897 (13000) 3900 (8600) 5.4L 3.73 6124 (13500) 3992 (8800) 5.4L 4.10 6803 (15000) 3991 (8800) SuperCab/Super Crew 4x2 w/automatic transmission 4.2L 3.55 4530 (10000) 2495 (5500) 4.6L 3.08 4530 (10000) 907 (2000) 4.6L 3.31 4763 (10500) 2676 (5900) 4.6L 3.55 5216 (11500) 3130 (6900)/ 2994 (6600) 5.4L 3.31 5443 (12000) 3311 (7300) 5.4L 3.55 5897 (13000) 3765 (8300)/ 3628 (8000) 5.4L 3.73 6124 (13500) 3900 (8600) 5.4L 4.10 6803 (15000) 3900 (8600) Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR-kg (lbs.) 166 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Engine Maximum trailer weight-kg (lbs.) Regular Cab 4x2 w/manual transmission 3.08 2944 (6500) 907 (2000) 3.55 3538 (7800) 1588 (3500) 3.08 2944 (6500) 907 (2000) 3.31 3265 (7200) 1315 (2900) 3.55 3538 (7800) 1588 (3500) SuperCab 4x2 w/manual transmission 3.08 2944 (6500) 907 (2000) 3.55 3538 (7800) 1497 (3300) 3.08 2944 (6500) 907 (2000) 3.31 3265 (7200) 1179 (2600) 3.55 3538 (7800) 1452 (3200) Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR-kg (lbs.) 4.2L 4.2L 4.6L 4.6L 4.6L 4.2L 4.2L 4.6L 4.6L 4.6L Engine Rear axle Maximum Maximum ratio/tire size - GCWR-kg (lbs.) trailer cm (inches) weight-kg (lbs.) Regular Cab 4x4 w/automatic transmission 4.2L 3.55/40.6 (16) 4536 (10000) 2449 (5400) 4.6L 3.31/40.6 (16) 4763 (10500) 2630 (5800) 4.6L 3.55/40.6 (16) 5216 (11500) 3084 (6800) 4.6L 3.55/43.2 (17) 4990 (11000) 2858 (6300) 5.4L 3.31/40.6 (16) 5443 (12000) 3266 (7200) 5.4L 3.55/40.6 (16) 5897 (13000) 3720 (8200) 5.4L 3.55/43.2 (17) 5670 (12500) 3493 (7700) 5.4L 3.73/40.6 (16) 6124 (13500) 3810 (8400) SuperCab/Super Crew 4x4 w/automatic transmission 4.6L 3.31/40.6 (16) 4763 (10500) 2540 (5600) 4.6L 3.55/40.6 (16) 5216 (11500) 2994 (6600)/ 2812 (6200) 4.6L 3.55/43.2 (17) 4990 (11000) 2767 (6100)/ 2585 (5700) 167 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Engine Rear axle ratio/tire size cm (inches) 3.31/40.6 (16) 3.55/40.6 (16) 3.55/43.2 (17) 3.73/40.6 (16) Maximum GCWR-kg (lbs.) 5443 (12000) 5897 (13000) 5670 (12500) 6124 (13500) Maximum trailer weight-kg (lbs.) 3175 (7000) 3628 (8000)/ 3447 (7600) 3401 (7500)/ 3221 (7100) 3719 (8200) 5.4L 5.4L 5.4L 5.4L Engine 4.2L 4.2L 4.6L 4.6L 4.6L 4.6L Maximum trailer weight kg (lbs.) Regular Cab 4x4 w/manual transmission 3.31 3265 (7200) 1179 (2600) 3.55 3538 (7800) 1452 (3200) 3.31 3265 (7200) 1134 (2500) 3.55 3538 (7800) 1406 (3100) SuperCab 4x4 w/manual transmission 3.31 3265 (7200) 1043 (2300) 3.55 3533 (7800) 1315 (2900) Rear axle ratio Maximum GCWR - kg (lbs.) Harley-Davidson F-150 4x2 w/automatic transmission Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR-kg trailer (lbs.) weight-kg (lbs.) 5.4L 3.73 4536 (10000) 2041 (4500) Supercharged Trailer frontal area considerations: • Not to exceed towing vehicle frontal area without Class III trailer towing package • Not to exceed 5.52 square meters (60 square feet) with Class III trailer towing package 168 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance. Hitches Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue. Load equalizing hitch When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the following procedure: 1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level. 2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle. 3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 0–13 mm (0.5 in) of the reference point. After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher than in Step 2. Note: Adjusting an equalizing hitch so the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the load equalizing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling. Safety chains Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners. If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you. Do not attach safety chains to the bumper. Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations. 169 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase. The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR. Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure your trailer lamps conform to local and Federal regulations. See your dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps. Using a step bumper (if equipped) The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a ball with a 25.4 mm (one inch) shank diameter. The bumper has a 2,270 kg (5,000 lb.) trailer weight and 227 kg (500 lb.) tongue weight capacity. If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed. Driving while you tow When towing a trailer: • Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades. • Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer. • To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the Understanding the positions of the 4–speed automatic transmission section in this chapter. • Anticipate stops and brake gradually. • Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur. Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for more information. Trailer towing tips • Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles. 170 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving • Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached. • The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight. • After you have traveled 80 km (50 miles), thoroughly check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts. • To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions). • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels. Launching or retrieving a boat Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water. When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval: • do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. • do not allow waves to break higher than 15 cm (6 inches) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper. Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components: • causing internal damage to the components. • affecting driveability, emissions and reliability. Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required. RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND) An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. Follow these guidelines if you have the need for recreational towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged. 2WD vehicles: • Place the transmission in N (Neutral) • Maximum speed is 56 km (35 mph) • Maximum distance is 80 km (50 miles) 171 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km (35 mph) must be exceeded, the drive shaft will have to be removed before the vehicle is towed. Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified technician. See your local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation. Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal transmission components. 4WD vehicles electronic shift transfer case: 4x4 vehicles with electronic shift on the fly cannot be towed with any wheels on the ground. SNOWPLOWING Ford recommends the following specifications for low speed, personal use snow removal: • F-150 4x4 (except F-150 Supercrew, Lightning and Harley-Davidson models) • 5.4L engine • Heavy-duty service package • Super engine cooling • Heavy-duty front suspension package • Automatic transmission with auxiliary automatic transmission fluid cooling • All-terrain tires • Limited slip and optional axle ratio. Do not install a snowplow and plow with your vehicle until it has been driven at least 800 km (500 miles). Installing the snowplow Read the following instructions before installing a snowplow: • Front GAWR must not exceed 63% of the GVW. Add ballast weight to the back of the vehicle, if necessary. Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label to find your vehicle’s front GAWR. • The Front Axle Accessory Reserve Capacity and the TARC listed on the bottom right of the Safety Compliance Certification Label will determine whether or not the addition of a snowplow will overload your vehicle. 172 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving • The weight of the snowplow and supporting components distributed to the front axle must not exceed the Front Axle Accessory Reserve Capacity. • The total weight of the snowplow and aftermarket equipment must not exceed the TARC. • The weight of the installed snowplow and aftermarket equipment must not load the vehicle beyond the GAWR (front/rear) and GVWR listed on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. • The total weight of the snowplow and aftermarket equipment must be considered part of the payload and must not exceed the GCWR for towing. • Federal and most local regulations require additional exterior lamps for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your dealer for additional information. • Tires have their maximum inflation pressure and associated load rating imprinted on the tire sidewall. This pressure may or may not be the same as that shown as recommended on the vehicle. The vehicle operator may have to adjust the tire inflation pressure to accommodate the snowplow and payload. Consult your dealer or equipment installer for help with proper inflation pressures. • Federal and some local regulations require additional exterior lamps for snowplow-equipped vehicles. Consult your dealer for additional information. • After installing a snowplow to the vehicle, ensure the vehicle’s front toe alignment and front ride height are within specification (reset if required). These specifications are located in the vehicle’s Workshop Manual. Note: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label. Removing snowplow After removing a snowplow from the vehicle, ensure the vehicle’s front toe alignment and front ride height are within specification (reset if required). Snowplowing with your air bag equipped vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with a driver and passenger air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) The SRS is designed to activate in certain frontal and offset frontal collisions when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration. 173 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving Careless or high speed driving while plowing snow which results in sufficient vehicle decelerations can deploy the air bag. Such driving also increases the risk of accidents. All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is provided. Never remove or defeat the “tripping mechanisms” designed into the snow removal equipment by its manufacturer. Doing so may cause damage to the vehicle and the snow removal equipment as well as possible air bag deployment. Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. Additional equipment such as snowplow equipment may effect the performance of the air bag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment. Engine temperature while plowing When driving with a plow, your engine may run at a higher temperature than normal because the attached snowplow blade will restrict airflow to the radiator. If you are driving more than 24 km (15 miles) at temperatures above freezing, angle the plow blade either full left or full right to provide maximum airflow to the radiator. If you are driving less than 24 km (15 miles) at speeds up to 64 km/h (40 mph) in cold weather, you will not need to worry about blade position to provide maximum airflow. Transmission operation while plowing • Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low) when plowing in small areas at speeds below 8 km/h (5 mph). • Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High) when plowing larger areas or light snow at higher speeds. Do not exceed 24 km/h (15 mph). • Do not shift the transmission from a forward gear to R (Reverse) until the engine is at idle and the wheels are stopped. 174 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Driving • If the vehicle is stuck, shift the transmission in a steady motion between forward and reverse gears. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes. The transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine can overheat. Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at operating temperature. Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute. The transmission and tires may be damaged or the engine may overheat. Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander. 175 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service is available: • 24–hours, seven days a week • for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 60,000 km (36,000 miles), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury vehicles, and four years or 80,000 km (50,000 miles) on Lincoln vehicles. Roadside assistance will cover: • changing a flat tire • jump-starts • lock-out assistance • limited fuel delivery • towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company dealership, or your selling dealer if within 56.3 km (35 miles) of the nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement). Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession). Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for information on: • coverage period • exact fuel amounts • towing of your disabled vehicle • emergency travel expense reimbursement • travel planning benefits USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, the card is found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment. U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. 176 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–665–2006. If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call 1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140. Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call 1–800–665–2006. ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer. Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact 1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca. HAZARD FLASHER The hazard flasher is located on the steering column, just behind the steering wheel. The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position. Push in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash. Press the flasher control again to turn them off. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery. FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH FUEL RESET This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt. After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch may have been activated. 177 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies This switch is located in the front passenger’s footwell, by the kick panel access cover. To reset the switch: 1. Turn the ignition OFF. 2. Check the fuel system for leaks. 3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the switch by pushing in on the reset button. 4. Turn the ignition ON. 5. Wait a few seconds and return the key to OFF. 6. Make another check of leaks. FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components. 15 Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire. 178 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse rating 2A 3A 4A 5A 7.5A 10A 15A 20A 25A 30A 40A 50A 60A 70A 80A Mini fuses Grey Violet Pink Tan Brown Red Blue Yellow Natural Green — — — — — Standard fuses Grey Violet Pink Tan Brown Red Blue Yellow Natural Green — — — — — Maxi fuses — — — — — — — Yellow — Green Orange Red Blue Tan Natural Cartridge Fuse link maxi cartridge fuses — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Blue Blue — — Pink Pink Green Green Red Red — Yellow — Brown — Black Passenger compartment fuse panel The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses. To remove a fuse use the fuse puller tool provided on the fuse panel cover. 179 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies 24 25 23 26 27 28 29 22 30 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 6 7 8 19 FUSE1 3 4 2 5 9 10 20 RELAY 5 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 The fuses are coded as follows. Fuse/Relay Location 1 2 3 4 5 Fuse Amp Rating 15A 5A 20A 5A 15A Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description Audio Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Cluster Cigar lighter, Data link connector Power mirror switch, Mirror turn signal relays Speed control module, Reverse lamp, Climate mode switch, Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) relay, Digital Transmission Range (DTR) sensor Cluster, Brake shift interlock solenoid, GEM 6 5A 180 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) RELAY 4 11 21 31 Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Location 7 8 Fuse Amp Rating — 5A Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description Not used Radio, Remote entry module, GEM, In-vehicle entertainment system (SuperCrew only) Not used Not used Front washer pump relay, Wiper run/park relay, Wiper HI/LO relay, Windshield wiper motor Not used Stop lamp switch (Lamps), Turn/Hazard flasher Battery saver relay, Interior lamp relay Stop lamp switch (speed control, brake shift interlock), GEM, Rear Anti-lock Brake System (RABS) module Headlamps (hi beams), Cluster (hi beam indicator) Not used Instrument illumination (dimmer switch power) Not used Audio, GEM, PCM, Transmission range sensor DTR sensor, Clutch switch, Starter relay, I/P fuse 20 Air bag module, Passenger air bag deactivation module 9 10 11 — — 30A 12 13 14 15 — 20A 15A 5A 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 20A — 5A — 5A 15A 10A 181 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Location 23 Fuse Amp Rating 10A Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel Description Trailer tow battery Charge relay, Turn/Hazard flasher, 4x4 solenoids, 4x4 relays, Overhead console, 4–Wheel Anti-lock Brake System (4WABS) module, EC mirror, Heated seats Function selector switch assembly Heated mirrors Right-hand low beam headlamp Foglamp relay and foglamp indicator, Main light switch (upstream) Left-hand low beam headlamp Autolamp module, Transmission overdrive control switch, Central security module, Beltminder Passive Anti-theft transceiver, Cluster, Ignition coils, PCM relay, Coil on plugs, Radio noise capacitor, ECC diode Not used Interior lamp relay Battery saver relay Not used One-touch down window relay Accessory delay relay 24 25 26 27 10A 10A 10A 5A 28 29 10A 5A 30 30A 31 Relay Relay Relay Relay Relay 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — — Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. The power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads. Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses. 182 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies Always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and specifications chapter. FULL RELAY 305 HALF RELAY 204 D 503 FULL RELAY 306 MAXI FUSE 118 MAXI FUSE 114 MAXI FUSE 110 MAXI FUSE 106 FUSE 3 FUSE 4 FUSE 1 FUSE 2 MAXI FUSE 103 MAXI FUSE 104 MAXI FUSE 105 HALF RELAY 209 FULL RELAY 304 HALF RELAY 206 D 502 HALF RELAY 203 CB602 MAXI FUSE 117 MAXI FUSE 113 D 501 HALF RELAY 208 HALF RELAY 205 HALF RELAY 202 MAXI FUSE 116 MAXI FUSE 112 FUSE 23 FUSE 24 FULL RELAY 303 HALF RELAY 207 HALF RELAY 201 CB601 R 401 MAXI FUSE 115 MAXI FUSE 111 FUSE 21 FUSE 22 FUSE 19 FUSE 20 FUSE 17 FUSE 18 FUSE 15 FUSE 16 FUSE 13 FUSE 14 FUSE 11 FUSE 12 FUSE 9 FUSE 10 FUSE 7 FUSE 8 The high-current fuses are coded as follows. Fuse/Relay Location 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Fuse Amp Rating 20A * 30A* 30A* 20A* 20A* 15A* 20A* Power Distribution Box Description Power point Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Main light switch, Headlamp relay, Multifunction switch Console power point (Harley Davidson only) Trailer tow back-up/park lamps Main light switch, Park lamp relay Horn 183 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) FUSE 5 FUSE 6 FULL RELAY 302 FULL RELAY 301 MAXI FUSE 107 MAXI FUSE 108 MAXI FUSE 109 MAXI FUSE 101 MAXI FUSE 102 Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Location 8 Fuse Amp Rating 15A* Power Distribution Box Description Power door locks, Central Security Module (CSM), Lock relays (not used on SuperCrew) Daytime Running Lamps (DRL), Fog lamps Fuel pump Alternator field Rear auxiliary power point (SuperCrew only) A/C clutch Not used Running board lamps Bi-fuel injector module, fuel selector switch and alternative fuel injectors (Bi-fuel vehicles only) Not used PCM, Fuel injectors, Fuel pump relay, Mass air flow sensor Trailer/Camper adapter (right stop/turn lamp) Trailer/Camper adapter (left stop/turn lamp) Not used Not used HEGO sensor, Automatic transmission Not used Trailer tow battery charge 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 15A* 20A* 20A* 20A* 15A* — 10A* 15A* 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 101 — 15A* 10A* 10A* — — 15A* — 30A** 184 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Location 102 Fuse Amp Rating 50/20A** Power Distribution Box Description Four-wheel Anti-lock Brake System (4WABS) module/Rear-wheel Anti-lock Brake System (RABS) module, Ignition switch Central junction box 4x4 shift motor & clutch Climate control front blower Intercooler pump (supercharged engine only) Not used Trailer tow electric brake Not used Accessory delay relay (Not used on SuperCrew) Ignition switch battery feed (start and run circuits) Drivers power seat, Adjustable pedal switch Ignition switch battery feed (run and accessory circuits) Not used Power door locks (SuperCrew only) Heated backlight Heated seats Trailer tow park lamp relay Front wiper run/park relay Trailer tow backup lamp relay A/C clutch relay Horn relay 185 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 201 202 203 204 205 50A** 30A** 40A** 20A** — 30A** — 30A** 40A** 30A** 40A** — 20A** 40A** – 30A** — — — — — 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies Fuse/Relay Location 206 207 208 209 301 302 303 304 305 306 401 501 502 503 601 Fuse Amp Rating — — — — — — — — — — — — — — CB Power Distribution Box Description Fog lamp relay Front washer pump relay Intercooler pump relay (supercharged engine only) Front wiper HI/LO relay Fuel pump relay Trailer tow battery charge relay Heated backlight relay (SuperCrew only) PCM relay Fuel pump HI/LO relay (supercharged engine only) Inertia switch relay (supercharged engine only) Not used PCM diode A/C compressor diode Not used Power windows, Moonroof (SuperCrew only) Not used 602 — *Mini fuses **Maxi fuses CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road. Harley-Davidson vehicles are equipped with a spare tire with a different speed rating than the road tires. It is not recommended that you exceed 112 km/h (70 mph) when the spare tire is in use. Though the spare tire is rated for 112 km/h (70 mph), always obey the local speed limits. The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may compromise the integrity of your tires. 186 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies Spare tire information Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire that may be used as a spare or a regular tire. The spare tire wheel may not match the road wheel, and is not equipped with wheel trim. The wheel trim from the wheel/tire may be used on the spare if the wheels match. If your vehicle is equipped with 4WD, a spare tire of a different size than the road tires should not be used. Use of such a tire could result in damage to driveline components and an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death. Location of the spare tire and tools The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following locations: Tool Spare tire Jack, lug nut wrench Location Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear bumper Regular cab: Under the seat on the passenger side Super Cab: Under the front or rear seat on the passenger side Super Crew cab: In the passenger side rear storage compartment On top of the radiator support at the front of the engine compartment In the glove box Jack handle Key, spare tire lock Removing the spare tire 1. If equipped with a two piece lug wrench, assemble the lug wrench as shown in the illustration. • To assemble, screw the parts together. To disassemble, unscrew. 187 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies 2. Attach the spare tire lock key (A) to the jack handle (B). 3. Fully insert the jack handle through the bumper hole and into the guide tube. The key and lock will engage with a slight push and counterclockwise turn. Some resistance will be felt when turning the jack handle assembly. 4. Turn the handle counterclockwise until tire is lowered to the ground, the tire can be slid rearward and the cable is slightly slack. 5. Remove the retainer from the spare tire. Tire change procedure To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured. Refer to the instruction sheet (located with the jack) for detailed tire change instructions. 188 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies 1. Park on a level surface, activate hazard flashers and set the parking brake. 2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or in the reverse gear (manual transmission)and turn engine OFF. 3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel. 4. Obtain the spare tire and jack from their storage locations. 5. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim. 6. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground. 7. Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground. 189 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park) or in the reverse gear (manual transmission). To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change the tire, be sure that the parking brake is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked. If the vehicle slips off the jack, someone could be seriously injured. • Front (4x2) • Front (4x4) 190 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies • Rear To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for changing the tire. • Never use the front or rear differential as a jacking point. 8. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench. 9. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered. 10. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 11. Remove the jack and fully 1 tighten the lug nuts in the order shown. • Five lug nut wheel 3 4 5 2 191 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies • Seven lug nut wheel 12. Stow the flat tire. Refer to Stowing the flat/spare tire. 13. Stow the jack and lug wrench. Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive. 14. Unblock the wheels. Bolt size Nm Wheel lug nut torque* Lb-ft 200 150 F-150 (five lug nut wheel): M14 x 2.0 F-150 with Heavy 135 100 Payload Package (seven lug nut wheel): M12 x 1.75 * Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. Stowing the flat/spare tire Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in failure of cable or loss of spare tire. 1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack hardware. 2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center. Pull on the cable to align the components at the end of the cable. 3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly and the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when 192 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies the tire is raised to the maximum tightness. Tighten to the best of your ability, to the point where the ratchet/slip occurs, if possible. The spare tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips with little effort, take the vehicle to your dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience. 4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly tightened. Try to push or pull, then turn the tire to be sure it will not move. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire. 5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure (every six months, per scheduled maintenance guide), or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other components. 6. If removed, install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the bumper drive tube with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle. JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage. Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if contacted. Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability; doing so may damage the catalytic converter. Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation. 1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle. 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle’s electrical system. 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts. 193 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Roadside Emergencies 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level. 5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical surges. Turn all other accessories off. Connecting the jumper cables 1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery. Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. 2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the assisting battery. 194 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) – – – + – + + + Roadside Emergencies 3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the assisting battery. 4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points. Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. 5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts. Jump starting 1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed. 2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. 195 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) – – – + + + + – Roadside Emergencies 3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables. Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected. 1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface. Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery. 2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the booster vehicle’s battery. 196 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) – – – – + + + + Roadside Emergencies 3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle’s battery. 4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the disabled vehicle’s battery. After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions. 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) – – – + + – + + 197 Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your roadside assistance service provider. Ford recommends your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. If equipped with air suspension, the air suspension control must be turned off. On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground. On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground. If you are towing a NASCAR Special Edition F-150 or a Harley-Davidson F-150 using flatbed equipment, you must place two 4X4 boards at the end of the ramp to allow for bumper clearance. If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle damage may occur. 198 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED At home Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to service your vehicle. It is preferred that you return to the authorized dealer where your vehicle was purchased when warranty repairs are needed. However, you may also take your vehicle to another Ford Motor Company or Ford of Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs. Certain warranty repairs require special training though, so not all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. That means that depending on the warranty repair needed, the vehicle may need to be taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership cannot assist you, then contact the Customer Relationship Center. If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving, follow these steps: 1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling/servicing dealership. 2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales Manager or Service Manager at the dealership. 3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center. Away from home If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help you. In the United States: Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) www.ford.com, click on “contact us” 199 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Customer Assistance In Canada: Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) www.ford.ca If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help you. In the United States: Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 1-800-521-4140 (TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952) www.ford.com, click on “contact us” In Canada: Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited P.O. Box 2000 Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 1-800-387-9333 www.lincolncanada.com In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre: • Your telephone number (home and business) • The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located • The year and make of your vehicle • The date of vehicle purchase • The current odometer reading • The vehicle identification number (VIN) If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.). In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states. 200 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Customer Assistance In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws. FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP is an optional service contract which is backed by Ford Motor Company or Ford Motor Service Company (in the U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in Canada). It provides the following: • Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain maintenance and wear items). • Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper Warranty expires. You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage. When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of Canada dealers. If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com. THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY) The Dispute Settlement Board is: • an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes. • available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company vehicles. 201 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Customer Assistance The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without incurring obligations per applicable state law. What kinds of cases does the Board review? Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle warranty are eligible for review, except those involving: • a non-Ford product • a non-Ford dealership • sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as designed • a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a service or product concern is being reviewed • items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including maintenance and wear items) • alleged personal injury/property damage claims • cases currently in litigation • vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes (except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to review commercial vehicles) • vehicles with non-U.S. warranties Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle. Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin purchasers/lessees. Board membership The Board consists of: • Three consumer representatives • A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen 202 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Customer Assistance from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for their business leadership qualities. What the Board needs To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return receipt requested. Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you will receive an acknowledgment indicating: • The file number assigned to your application. • The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator. Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be asked to submit statements. To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information: • Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders relevant to the case. • The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed on your vehicle ownership license. • The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s). • The current mileage. • The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle. • A brief description of your unresolved concern. • A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor Company. • The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the dealership(s). • A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern. You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not qualify for Board review. Oral presentations If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question 6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation may be requested by the Board as well. 203 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Customer Assistance Making a decision Board members review all available information related to each complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party. Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to consider some cases. After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to them under state or federal law. To request a DSB Brochure/Application For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call to the Board at the following address/phone number: Dispute Settlement Board P.O. Box 5120 Southfield, MI 48086–5120 1–800–428–3718 You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952 or by writing to the Center at the following address: Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P.O. Box 6248 Dearborn, Michigan 48121 UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings. 204 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Customer Assistance In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada. CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685. GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel. If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or owner relations/customer relationship office. The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel. In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U.S. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call: FORD MOTOR COMPANY WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park #3 Allen Park, Michigan 48101 U.S.A. Telephone: (313) 594-4857 FAX: (313) 390-0804 If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office. If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market Operations. 205 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Customer Assistance ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at: HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07150 Detroit, Michigan 48207 Or call: For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356 Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website: www.helminc.com. (Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or money order.) Obtaining a French owner’s guide French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box 1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3. IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY) California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle. California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 29,000 km (18,000 miles), whichever occurs first: 1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR 206 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Customer Assistance 3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time) In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address: Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE-B Dearborn, MI 48126 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor Company. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA 400 Seventh Street U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline. 207 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral Ph shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available from your dealer. • Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces. • Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight. • Always use a clean sponge or carwash mitt with plenty of water for best results. • Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting. • It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle. • Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s paintwork and trim over time. • Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a car wash. • Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash off as soon as possible. • If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running board surface, as the area may become slippery. WAXING Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage. • Wash the vehicle first. • Do not use waxes that contain abrasives. • Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body (low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time. 208 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Cleaning PAINT CHIPS Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color. Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to your dealer to ensure you get the correct color. • Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips. • Always read the instructions before using the products. ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish. In order to maintain their shine: • Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A), which is available from your dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water. • Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers. • Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time. • Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent. • To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42), available from your dealer. ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing: • Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage. • Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components. • Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. • Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine. 209 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Cleaning • 4.2L V6 engine • 4.6L V8 and 5.4L V8 engine 210 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Cleaning • 5.4L Supercharged V8 engine • Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage. PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available from your dealer. • For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A). • If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42). WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the windshield, rear window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips: • The windshield or rear window may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your dealer. • Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches. • Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts. • Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly. 211 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Cleaning INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth. • Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection. Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the air bag system. • Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces. INTERIOR TRIM • Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then dry by wiping with a dry, soft, clean cloth. • Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish. INTERIOR For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts: • Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner. • Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-41). • If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14). • Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution. • Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials. Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing. 212 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Cleaning LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED, EXCEPT FOR THE KING RANCH SUPERCREW) Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the leather. For King Ranch F-150 SuperCrew leather seats, refer to separate section in this chapter. • To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth. • To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer. • Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating. LEATHER SEATS FOR THE KING RANCH F-150 SUPERCREW ONLY (IF EQUIPPED) Your vehicle is equipped with seating covered in premium, top-grain leather which is extremely durable, but still requires special care and maintenance in order to ensure longevity and comfort. Regular cleaning and conditioning will maintain the appearance of the leather. Failure to care for the leather can result in drying out and fading of the material. CLEANING For dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use a clean, damp cloth or soft brush. First use a dry cloth then wipe with a damp cloth. Allow the area to dry, then apply conditioner. • Clean spills as quickly as possible. • Test any cleaner or stain remover on an inconspicuous part of the leather as cleaners may darken the leather. For more specific cleaning information, contact the King Ranch Saddle Shop at 1–800–282–KING (5464). • Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard, orange juice or oil-based products on the leather as they may permanently stain the leather. • Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl or plastics. 213 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Cleaning SCRATCHES In order to lessen the appearance of certain scratches and other wear marks, apply conditioner on the affected area following the same instructions as in the Conditioning section. CONDITIONING Bottles of King Ranch Leather Conditioner are available at the King Ranch Saddle Shop. Visit the Web site at www.krsaddleshop.com, or telephone (in the United States) 1–800–282–KING (5464). If you are unable to obtain King Ranch Leather Conditioner, use another premium leather conditioner. • Apply your first conditioning treatment within six months of taking delivery of your vehicle. Condition twice yearly in order to replenish lost oils and revitalize the aroma, suppleness and resilience of the leather. • Clean the surfaces using the steps outlined in the Cleaning section. • Ensure the leather is dry then apply a nickel-sized amount of conditioner to a clean, dry cloth • Rub the conditioner into leather until it disappears. Allow the conditioner to dry and repeat the process for the entire interior. If a film appears, wipe off film with a dry, clean cloth. UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt. TONNEAU COVER (IF EQUIPPED) Wash with Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13), which is available from your dealer. • Do not use any silicone based cleaner or conditioner. • Do not use stiff bristle brushes or abrasive materials or cleaners. • Hot waxes applied by commercial car washes can affect the cleanability of vinyl material. • Using high water pressure or wand-type car washes against the vinyl cover and tonneau frame rails may cause water leaks and possible seal damage. 214 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Cleaning FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent quality: Motorcraft Custom Clearcoat Polish (ZC–8–A) Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada) (F2AZ—19530–A) Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93) Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94) Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada) (ZC-11–A) Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (not available in Canada) (ZC-42) Motorcraft Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada) (ZC-41) Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15) Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A) Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A) Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26) Ford Premium Car Wash Concentrate (F2SZ-19523–WC) Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100) Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14) Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A) Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28) Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13) Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada) (ZC-23) Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) * May be sold with the Motorcraft name 215 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle: • We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy location. • We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking routine service easy. If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide/Owner Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered. Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE • Do not work on a hot engine. • Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts. • Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. • Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away from the battery and all fuel related parts. Working with the engine off • Automatic transmission: 1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park). 2. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 3. Block the wheels. • Manual transmission: 1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1 (First). 2. Turn off the engine and remove the key. 3. Block the wheels. 216 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Working with the engine on • Automatic transmission: 1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park). 2. Block the wheels. • Manual transmission: 1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in N (Neutral). 2. Block the wheels. Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. OPENING THE HOOD 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel. 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located under the front center of the hood. 3. Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open. HOOD BRAKE 217 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4.2L V6 engine 1. Battery 2. Engine oil filler cap 3. Engine oil dipstick 4. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission) 5. Brake fluid reservoir 6. Power distribution box 7. Engine coolant reservoir 8. Air filter assembly 9. Power steering fluid reservoir 10. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission) 11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 218 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications 4.6L V8/5.4L V8 engines 1. Power steering fluid reservoir 2. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission) 3. Engine oil dipstick 4. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Power distribution box 6. Air filter assembly 7. Engine coolant reservoir 8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 9. Battery 10. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission) 11. Engine oil filler cap 219 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications 5.4L Supercharged V8 engine 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 1. Engine oil dipstick 2. Power steering fluid reservoir 3. Brake fluid reservoir 4. Power distribution box 5. Engine coolant reservoir 6. Air filter assembly 7. Intercooler coolant reservoir 8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 9. Battery 10. Transmission fluid dipstick 11. Engine oil filler cap 220 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. In very cold weather, do not fill the reservoir completely. Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification WSB-M8B16–A2. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive. Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system. If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 4.5° C (40° F), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident. Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components. ENGINE OIL Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil. 1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground. 2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan. 3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission). 4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat. 221 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications • 4.2L engine 222 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications • 4.6L/5.4L engine 5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). 6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it again. • If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL. • If the oil level is below the MIN mark, add enough oil to raise the level within the MIN-MAX range. 223 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications • Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by a service technician. 7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated. Adding engine oil 1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter. 2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening. 3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick). 4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated. 5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated. To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed. Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark. Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil. Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American Petroleum Institute (API). To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an equivalent 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C153–H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine. Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty. 224 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up engine noises or knock may be experienced. It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application. BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service. However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the battery electrolyte level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules. Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”. Do not overfill the battery cells. If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the charging system checked. If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced. For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals. If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water. 225 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper ventilation. When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. Because your vehicle’s engine is also electronically controlled by a computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance. To begin this process: 1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake. 2. Put the gearshift in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or the neutral position (manual transmission), turn off all accessories and start the engine. 3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute. 6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process. • The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 miles) or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. 226 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications • If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned. If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected. • Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner. Follow your local authorized standards for disposal. Call your local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries. RE AD TU LE RN RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the mileage intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled water, which equates to a freeze point of -36° C (-34° F). Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant should be maintained at the “cold full” of “cold fill range” level in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section. Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above 60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A 50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following: • Freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F). • Boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F). • Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion. • Enables calibrated gauges to work properly. 227 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold, check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir. COLD FILL RANGE • The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon application). • Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval schedules. • Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter. If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval, the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter. Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location. Adding engine coolant When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained. Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. 228 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield. • Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored), VC-7–A (VC-7–B in Oregon), meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51–A1. Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, may darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to golden tan. • Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection. • A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone (without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing. • Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing. • Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant. For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the “cold full” level. For all other vehicles, which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant. To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. 229 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications 1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool. 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic bottle). Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release. 3. Step back while the pressure releases. 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap. 5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see above), to within the “cold fill range” or the “cold full” level on the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full. 6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss.) After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer to Checking Engine Coolant section. If the concentration is not 50/50 (protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50 coolant concentration. Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level. If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage. Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available. Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids. Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer to Refill capacities in this chapter. 230 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this chapter. Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –36° C [–34° F]): • It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%. • NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%. • Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. • Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months. If you drive in extremely hot climates: • It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40%. • NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%. • Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. • Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. • Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive. Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection. What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped) If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred. The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load and terrain. 231 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications How fail-safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat: • The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot) area. H C and the symbol • The will illuminate. • The “Service Engine Soon” indicator light will illuminate. If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine. When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However: • The engine power will be limited. • The air conditioning system will be disabled. Continued operation will increase the engine temperature: • The engine will completely shut down. • Steering and braking effort will increase. Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. When fail-safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage, therefore: 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. 2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility. 3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool. 4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low. Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. 232 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications 5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility. Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible. WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS Important safety precautions Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled. Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent. Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel: • Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling your vehicle. • Always turn off the vehicle before fueling. • Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours. 233 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury. • Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury. • Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation. • Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction. When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes. The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container. Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container: • Place approved fuel container on the ground. • DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the cargo area). • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling. • DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position. 234 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Fuel Filler Cap Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off feature. When fueling your vehicle: 1. Turn the engine off. 2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops. 3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe. 4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe. 5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops. If the “Check Fuel Cap” indicator comes on or if “Service Engine Soon/Check Engine” indicator comes on and stays on when you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap properly and reinstall it. If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others. If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury. Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components. Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds, including manganese-based additives. 235 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was not designed may not be covered by your warranty. Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use “Regular” unleaded gasoline with pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87. We do not recommend the use of (R+M)/2 METHOD gasolines labeled as “Regular” that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas. Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified service technician to prevent any engine damage. 87 Supercharged engines Your vehicle is designed to use “Premium” unleaded gasoline with an (R+M)/2 octane rating of 91 or higher for optimum performance. (R+M)/2 METHOD The use of gasolines with lower octane ratings may degrade performance. We do not recommend the use of gasolines labeled as “Premium” in high altitude areas that are sold with octane ratings of less than 91. If your engine knocks under any driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified service technician to prevent any engine damage. 91 Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability problems during a cold start, try a different brand of “Regular” unleaded gasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended (particularly in the United States) because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty. Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved 236 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle. Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter. Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to improve air quality. Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse affect on powertrain components. If you have run out of fuel: • You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. • Your “Service Engine Soon” indicator may come on. For more information on the “Service Engine Soon” indicator, refer to the Instrument cluster chapter. Fuel Filter For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter. Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used. ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate measurement after 3,000 km–5,000 km (2,000 miles-3,000 miles). Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities section of this chapter. 237 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank. For consistent results when filling the fuel tank: • Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling, an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running. • Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time the tank is filled. • Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling. • Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating. • Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand. • Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up. • Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time. Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent. Calculating fuel economy 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading (in kilometers or miles). 2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters or gallons). 3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading. 4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading. 5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy: Calculation 1: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers traveled. Calculation 2: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used. 238 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy. Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy. Habits • Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel. • Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy. • Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste fuel. • Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop. • Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy. • Slow down gradually. • Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15% less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]). • Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy. • Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy. • You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs. Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy. • Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy. • Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy. • Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving. Maintenance • Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size. • Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy. • Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter. 239 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications • Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide. Conditions • Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed. • Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately 0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried). • Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may reduce fuel economy. • To maximize the fuel economy, drive with the tonneau cover installed (if equipped). • Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy. • Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 12–16 km (8–10 miles) of driving. • Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain. • Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal. • Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than two-wheel-drive operation. • Close windows for high speed driving. EPA window sticker Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles. It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window sticker. These numbers represent the Range of L/100 km (MPG) expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with 240 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly: • Use only the specified fuel listed. • Avoid running out of fuel. • Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds. • Have the items listed in your scheduled maintenance guide performed according to the specified schedule. The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system. If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability. Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire. Illumination of the “Service Engine Soon” light, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly. Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up specifications. Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty information. 241 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications On board diagnostics (OBD-II) Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists the service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Check Engine/Service Engine Soon light illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your Check Engine/Service Engine Soon light to illuminate. Examples are: 1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run poorly.) 2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel. 3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the Check Engine/Service Engine Soon light should turn off. (A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required. If the Check Engine/Service Engine Soon light remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of the on-board diagnostics system. If your “Service Engine Soon” light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test with the “Service Engine Soon” light on. If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced, the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test” condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as described below: • First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway. • Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with at least four idle periods. Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The 242 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use only MERCON ATF. 1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C). 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several times. 3. Turn the engine off. 4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this range. 5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. 243 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear, and will rise when the brake components are replaced. Fluid levels below the “MAX” line that do not trigger the brake system warning lamp are within the normal operating range, there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range, the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek service from your dealer immediately. CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED) Check the fluid level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the service interval schedules. During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should remain constant. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid level to the step in the reservoir. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Ford specification ESA-M6C25–A. Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. 244 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications 1. Clean the reservoir cap before removal to prevent dirt and water from entering the reservoir. 2. Remove cap and rubber diaphragm from reservoir. 3. Add fluid until the level reaches the step in the reservoir. 4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and cap onto reservoir. TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped) Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly, i.e. if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage. Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking. 1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating temperature. 2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake. 3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal, start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage. 245 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications 4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running. 5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick. 6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube. 7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature. Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick and the ambient temperature is above 10°C (50°F). DON’T ADD ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20 miles) of driving. You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature. The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating DON’T ADD temperature (66°C-77°C [150°F-170°F]). ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD 246 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature (10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]). DON’T ADD ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure. An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns and/or possible damage. High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition. DON’T ADD ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the Lubricant specifications section in this chapter. Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage. If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct. If an overfill occurs, excess fluid should be removed by a qualified DON’T ADD technician. An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement ADD COLD HOT DO NOT ADD concerns and/or possible damage. Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components. 247 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped) 1. Clean the filler plug. 2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level. 3. Fluid level should be at bottom of the opening. 4. Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening. 5. Install and tighten the fill plug securely. Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. 248 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Checking and adding transfer case fluid (if equipped) 1. Clean the filler plug. 2. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level. 3. Add only enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening. Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant Specifications in this chapter. DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require lubrication. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for maintenance intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary. 249 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element. When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter element listed. Refer to Motorcraft Part Numbers. Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running. Changing the air filter element 1. Loosen the clamp that secures the air filter element in place. 2. Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing. 3. Remove the air filter element from the open end of the air filter housing. 4. Install a new air filter element. 5. Reassemble the two halves of the air filter housing, aligning the notch and slot found on the top of each half. Secure the clamp, making sure not to crimp the air filter edges between the two halves of the air filter housing. This could cause filter damage and allow unmetered air to enter the engine if not properly seated. 250 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING New vehicles are fitted with tires that have a rating on them called Tire Quality Grades. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: • Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set. Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2). U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S. Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA A B C The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 251 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics. Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. SERVICING YOUR TIRES Checking the tire pressure • Use an accurate tire pressure gauge. • Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least one hour or has been driven less than 5 km (3 miles). • Adjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the Certification Label inside of driver’s door. Tire pressure information can also be found on the Tire Information label located on the inside of the fuel filler door. Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. 252 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Tire rotation Because your vehicle’s tires perform different jobs, they often wear differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the scheduled maintenance guide. If you notice that the tires wear unevenly, have them checked. The following procedure applies to vehicles equipped with single rear wheels, if your vehicle is equipped with dual rear wheels it is recommended that only the front wheels be rotated (side to side). • Four tire rotation • Five tire rotation 253 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Replacing the tires Replace the tires when the wear band is visible through the tire treads. Due to exposure to the elements and exhaust you should replace the spare tire when you replace the other tires. When replacing full size tires, never mix radial bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the Certification Label. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations recommended on the label. If you do not follow these precautions, your vehicle handling may be affected which can lead to loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type, speed rating, load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g. “All Terrain”, “Touring”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford. Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires or larger size tires. Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the handling of the vehicle, and increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also affect the accuracy of your speedometer. SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you currently have on your vehicle. The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow 254 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip aluminum wheels. Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains: • Use only SAE Class S chains. • Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines. • Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle. • If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle. • Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. • The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains. MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS Component 4.2L V6 engine Air filter element Fuel filter Oil filter PCV valve Battery (standard) Battery (heavy duty) Spark plugsplatinum1 FA-1632 FG-986B FL-400-S EV-251 BXT-59 BXT-65-650 2 4.6L V8 engine FA-1632 FG-986B FL-820-S EV-243 BXT-59 BXT-65-650 5.4L V8 engine FA-1632 FG-986B FL-820-S EV-233 BXT-59 BXT-65-650 5.4L Supercharged V8 engine FA-1682 FG-986B FL-820-S EV-233 – BXT-65-6 50 AGSF-34EE AGSF-32PM AGSF-22W AGSF-12E or 3 2, AGSF-12FM1 1 Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark plug gap information. 2 If a spark plug is removed for inspection and replaced, it must be reinstalled in the same cylinder. If a spark plug needs to be replaced, use only spark plugs with the service number suffix letter as shown above. 3 Use only AGSF-12FM1 spark plugs for replacement. 255 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications REFILL CAPACITIES Fluid Brake fluid and clutch fluid Ford Part Name Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored) Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored) Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil (US) Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil (Canada) N/A Application All Capacity Fill to line or step (for clutch) on reservoir Engine coolant 4.2L V6 engine 4.6L V8 engine 5.4L V8 engine 5.4L Supercharged V8 engine All 19.0L (20.1 quarts) 19.5L (20.6 quarts) 22.6L (23.9 quarts) 4.0L (4.2 quarts) 1 Intercooler coolant1 Engine oil (includes filter change)8 5.7L (6.0 quarts) Fuel tank 4x4 Reg. Cab with short wheelbase 4x2 Regular Cab, SuperCab and SuperCrew with short wheelbase All long Wheelbase 92.7L (24.5 gallons) 94.6L (25.0 gallons) 113.6L (30.0 gallons) 256 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Fluid Power steering fluid Transfer case fluid Transmission fluid 3 Ford Part Application Name Motorcraft All MERCON ATF Capacity Fill to between MIN and MAX lines on reservoir 1.9L (2.0 quarts) 2 3.5L (3.75 quarts) 4 16.1L (17.0 quarts) 4 16.7L (17.7 quarts) 13.2L (13.9 quarts) 2.0L (3.7 pints) 4 Motorcraft 4x4 vehicles MERCON ATF Motorcraft 5-speed manual MERCON ATF Automatic4R100 (4x2) Automatic4R100 (4x4) Motorcraft AutomaticMERCON V ATF 4R70W Front axle Motorcraft SAE 4x4 vehicles 75W-90 Premium 4x4 Front Axle Lubricant Rear axle 5 Motorcraft SAE 8.8/9.75 inch 75W-140 axle Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant Rear axle 5 Motorcraft SAE 10.25 inch axle 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant Windshield Motorcraft All washer fluid Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate 4 2.6L (5.5 pints) 6 3.3L (6.9 pints) 7 4.0L (4.25 quarts) 1 2 Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transfer case to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. 257 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications 3 Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine the correct service interval. Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as MERCON and MERCON V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON type fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that require the MERCON V type fluid. MERCON and MERCON V type fluids are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCON and MERCON V. Use of a transmission fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCON and MERCON V) in an automatic transmission application requiring MERCON may cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. 4 Approximate dry fill capacity including transmission fluid cooling system, actual refill capacities will vary based on vehicle application and transmission fluid cooling system (i.e. coolers size, cooling lines. auxiliary cooler capacities). The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range. 5 Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant and is considered lubricated for life. These lubricants do not need to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the axle assembly has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time the rear axle has been submerged in water. 6 Service refill capacity is determined by filling the axle to 6-14 mm (1/4-9/16 inch) below the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A, for complete fill of 8.8 inch and 9.75 inch Traction-Lok axles. 7 Service refill capacity is determined by filling the axle to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. For 10.25 inch Traction-Lok axles, use 3.1L (6.5 pints) of Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant and 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A. 8 Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C153–H and the API Certification mark. 258 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS Item Ford part name or equivalent Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Premium 4x4 Front Axle Lubricant Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 High Performance Synthetic Rear Axle Lube 1 Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored) Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil (Canada) Ford part number XY-75W90-TQL Ford specification WSP-M2C201-A Front axle (4X4) XY-75W140–QL WSL-M2C192-A Rear axle PM-1 Brake fluid and clutch fluid Engine coolant ESA-M6C25-A and DOT 3 VC-7–A WSSM97B51-A1 Engine oil WSS-M2C153-H XO-5W20-QSP and API (US) CXO-5W20–LSP12Certification Mark (Canada) 259 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Item Hinges, latches, striker plates, fuel filler door hinge and seat tracks. Lock cylinders Ford part name or equivalent Multi-Purpose Grease Ford part number XG-4 or XL-5 Ford specification ESR-M1C159-A or ESB-M1C93-B Motorcraft Motorcraft XL-1 none penetrating and lock lubricant Premium XG-1-C or ESA-M1C75-B Transmission /steering/parking Long-Life Grease XG-1-K brake linkages and pivots, brake and clutch pedal shaft (if equipped) Power steering Motorcraft XT-2-QDX MERCON fluid, transfer MERCON ATF case fluid (4X4) and transmission fluid (manual) Motorcraft XT-2-QDX MERCON Automatic MERCON ATF transmission (4R100) 2 Motorcraft XT-5-QM Automatic MERCON V MERCON V transmission ATF (4R70W) 2 Motorcraft ZC-32–A WSB-M8B16–A2 Premium Windshield Windshield washer fluid Washer Concentrate 1 Add 118 ml (4 oz) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of 260 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Traction-Lok axles. Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of 10.25 and 10.5 inch Traction-Lok axles. 2 Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine the correct service interval. Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as MERCON and MERCON V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON type fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that require the MERCON V type fluid. MERCON and MERCON V type fluids are not interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCON and MERCON V. Use of a transmission fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCON and MERCON V) in an automatic transmission application requiring MERCON may cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. ENGINE DATA Engine Cubic inches Required fuel Firing order Spark plug gap Ignition system Compression ratio 4.2L V6 engine 256 87 octane 1-4-2-5-3-6 1.3-1.4 mm (0.052-0.056 inch) EDIS 9.3:1 4.6L V8 engine 281 87 octane 5.4L V8 engine 330 87 octane 5.4L Supercharged V8 engine 330 91 octane 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1.3-1.4 mm (0.052-0.056 inch) Coil on plug 9.37:1 1.3-1.4 mm (0.052-0.056 inch) Coil on plug 9.0:1 1.3-1.4 mm (0.052-0.056 inch) Coil on plug 9.0:1 261 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications VEHICLE DIMENSIONS Styleside Dimension Regular Cab 4x2 5256 mm (206.9 in) (SWB) 5729 mm (225.5 in) (LWB) 1989mm (78.3 in)1 1846 mm (72.7 in) (SWB) 1838 mm (72.4 in) (LWB) 3045 mm (119.9 in) (SWB) 3518 mm (138.5 in) (LWB) 1661 mm (65.4 in) 1661 mm (65.4 in) Body Regular Cab 4x4 5264 mm (207.2 in) (SWB) 5736 mm (225.8 in) (LWB) 2019 mm (79.5 in)1 1915 mm (75.4 in) (SWB) 1907 mm (75.1 in) (LWB) 3053 mm (120.2 in) (SWB) 3526 mm (138.8 in) (LWB) 1661 mm (65.4 in) 1661 mm (65.4 in) Style Super Cab 4x2 5728 mm (225.5 in) (SWB) 6201 mm (244.1 in) (LWB) 1989 mm (78.3 in)1 1849 mm (72.8 in) (SWB) 1841 mm (72.5 in) (LWB) 3518 mm (138.5 in) (SWB) 3990 mm (157.1 in) (LWB) 1661 mm (65.4 in) 1661 mm (65.4 in) Super Cab 4x4 5735 mm (225.8 in) (SWB) 6208 mm (244.4 in) (LWB) 2019 mm (79.5 in)1 1918 mm (75.5 in) (SWB) 1907 mm (75.1 in) (LWB) 3526 mm (138.8 in) (SWB) 3998 mm (157.4 in) (LWB) 1661 mm (65.4 in) 1661 mm (65.4 in) (1) Overall length (2) Overall width (3) Overall height (4) Wheel base (5)Track front/rear 1 Vehicle width, including mirrors: 2279 mm (89.7 in) 262 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Flareside Dimension (1) Overall length (2) Overall width (3) Overall height (4) Wheel base (5) Track front/rear 1 Regular Cab 4x2 5255 mm (206.9 in) 2014 mm (79.3 in)1 1846 mm (72.7 in) 3046 mm (119.9 in) 1661 mm (65.4 in) Body Regular Cab 4x4 5263 mm (207.2 in) 2030 mm (79.9 in)1 1915 mm (75.4 in) 3053 mm (120.2 in) 1661 mm (65.4 in) Style Super Cab 4x2 5728 mm (225.5 in) 2014 mm (79.3 in)1 1849 mm (72.8 in) 3518 mm (138.5 in) 1661 mm (65.4 in) Super Cab 4x4 5735 mm (225.8 in) 2030 mm (79.9 in)1 1918 mm (75.5 in) 3526 mm (138.8 in) 1661 mm (65.4 in) Vehicle width, including mirrors: 2279 mm (89.7 in) 3 5 2 263 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications 4 1 4 1 264 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications F-150 SuperCrew Dimension (1) Overall length (2) Overall width (3) Overall height (4) Wheel base (5)Track front/rear 1 2 Body Style SuperCrew 4x2 mm SuperCrew 4x4mm (in) (in) 5738 5745 (225.9) (226.2) 2029 2009 (79.9)1 (79.1)1 1878 1953 (73.9)2 (76.9) 3518 3525 (138.5) (138.8) 1661 1 661 (65.4) (65.4) Vehicle width, including mirrors: 2293 mm (90.3 in) Harley-Davidson height is 1852 mm (72.9 in) 3 5 2 265 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications 4 1 IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Certification label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Certification label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Certification label may be located. The Certification label is located on the front door latch pillar on the driver’s side. 266 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Maintenance and Specifications Vehicle identification number (VIN) The vehicle identification number is attached to a metal tag and is located on the driver side instrument panel. (Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number.) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1. World manufacturer identifier 2. Brake type and gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 3. Vehicle line, series, body type 4. Engine type 5. Check digit 6. Model year 7. Assembly plant 8. Production sequence number Engine number The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification number) is stamped on the engine block and transmission. Harley-Davidson serialization plate The Harley-Davidson Edition contains a serialization plate that is unique and custom made for each Harley-Davidson vehicle. The serialization plate contains the model year, vehicle identification number and build sequence number. This information is added to the plate at the time of vehicle build. Since plate is custom made, it is not a serviceable part. 267 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Accessories FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of genuine Ford accessories are available for your vehicle through your local authorized Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Ford accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit: • 12 months or 20,000 km (12,000 miles) (whichever occurs first), or • the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty. This means that genuine Ford accessories purchased along with your new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 60,000 km (36,000 miles) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty. Not all accessories are available for all models. Following is a list of several Ford Genuine Accessory products. Not all accessories are available for all models. To find out what accessories are available for your vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online store at: www.fordaccessoriesstore.com. Vehicle Security Air bag anti-theft locks Locking gas cap StyledWheel locks Vehicle security systems Comfort and convenience Air filtration systems Automatic Headlamp System with Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Battery warmer/blanket Cargo organizers (interior) Cargo storage bin (regular cab) 268 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Accessories Cargo trays (interior) Cellular phone holder Daytime running lights (DRL) Dash trim (wood grain) Engine block heaters Manual sliding rear window Power sliding rear window Remote start system Tire step Travel equipment Cargo cage (SuperCrew only) Bed mount bike carrier Bed tent Fog lights Hitch mount bike carrier Inside mirror with compass display Inside mirror with compass and temperature display Off road lights Outside signal mirror (available only with power mirrors) Pickup box rails Retractable bed hooks Running boards (molded, diamond plate, tubular and stirrup step) Seatback organizer Speed control Towing mirrors Trailer hitch (Class III) Trailer hitch bars and balls Trailer hitch wiring adaptor Trailer swivel hitch 269 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Accessories Protection and appearance equipment Bed mat/bedliner tailgate covers Bed mats Bedliners Bull bar (chrome & black) Cap (hard, color keyed — Leer supplier branded) Carpet floor mats Commercial Cap (Leer supplier branded) Cargo cover Cargo liner Chrome grill insert Diamond plate, bed rail caps Diamond plate, front box protector Diamond plate, splash guards Diamond plate, tool box Door edge guards Fender flares Flat splash guards Front end covers (full) Grill guard/brush guard Hood deflectors Leather wrapped steering wheel Molded splash guards Molded “all weather” vinyl floor mats Side window air deflectors Tailgate covers, diamond plate Tonneau covers (hard, color keyed — Leer supplier branded) Tonneau covers (soft) Truck cover Universal floor mats Wheels 270 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Accessories For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle: • When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety compliance certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight information. • The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile communications systems - such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician. • Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use or are not properly installed. When operated, such systems may cause the engine to stumble or stall or cause the transmission to be damaged or operate improperly. In addition, such systems may be damaged or their performance may be affected by operating your vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily affect your vehicle’s operation.) • Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage that may result from the use of such equipment. 271 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Index A Accessory delay. 60 Air bag supplemental restraint system. 111 and child safety seats. 112 description. 111 disposal. 115 driver air bag. 113 indicator light. 114 operation. 113 passenger air bag. 113 passenger deactivation switch. 115 Air cleaner filter. 250, 255 Air conditioning. 40 Ambulance packages. 8 Antifreeze (see Engine coolant). 227 Anti-lock brake system (see Brakes). 141 Armrests. 97 Audio system Single CD. 22 Audio system (see Radio). 20, 22, 28, 32 Automatic transmission. 144 driving an automatic overdrive. 145 fluid, adding. 245 fluid, checking. 245 fluid, refill capacities. 256 fluid, specification. 261 Auxiliary power point. 58 Axle lubricant specifications. 259, 261 refill capacities. 256 traction lok. 143 272 B Battery. 225 acid, treating emergencies. 225 jumping a disabled battery. 193 maintenance-free. 225 replacement, specifications. 255 servicing. 225 Bed extender. 72 BeltMinder. 106 Brakes. 141 anti-lock. 141 anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light. 141 fluid, checking and adding. 244 fluid, refill capacities. 256 fluid, specifications. 259, 261 lubricant specifications. 259, 261 parking. 142 shift interlock. 144 Bulbs. 48 C Calculating load. 165 Capacities for refilling fluids. 256 Cassette tape player. 22, 28 CD-single premium. 20, 32 Cell phone use. 59 Certification Label. 266 Changing a tire. 186 Child safety restraints. 120 child safety belts. 120 Child safety seats. 123 attaching with tether straps. 128 in front seat. 124 in rear seat. 124, 127 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Index Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment. 209 exterior. 214 instrument panel. 212 interior. 212 interior trim. 212 plastic parts. 211 safety belts. 212 washing. 208 waxing. 208 wheels. 209 wiper blades. 211 Climate control (see Air conditioning or Heating). 40 Clock adjust Single CD. 22 Clutch fluid. 244 operation while driving. 148 recommended shift speeds. 148 Compass, electronic. 56 calibration. 58 set zone adjustment. 57 Console. 59 overhead. 55 Coolant checking and adding. 227 refill capacities. 230, 256 specifications. 259, 261 Cruise control (see Speed control). 63 Customer Assistance. 176 Ford accessories for your vehicle. 215 Ford Extended Service Plan. 201 Getting assistance outside the U.S. and Canada. 205 Getting roadside assistance. 176 Getting the service you need. 199 Ordering additional owner’s literature. 206 The Dispute Settlement Board. 201 Utilizing the Mediation/ Arbitration Program. 204 D Daytime running lamps (see Lamps). 45 Dipstick automatic transmission fluid. 245 engine oil. 221 Doors lubricant specifications. 259 Driveline universal joint and slip yoke. 249 Driving under special conditions. 147, 156, 159 sand. 158 snow and ice. 160 through water. 159, 163 E Emergencies, roadside jump-starting. 193 Emergency Flashers. 177 Emission control system. 240 Engine. 261–262 cleaning. 209 coolant. 227 fail-safe coolant. 231 idle speed control. 225 lubrication specifications. 259, 261 273 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Index refill capacities. 256 service points. 218–220 starting after a collision. 177 Engine block heater. 140 Engine oil. 221 checking and adding. 221 dipstick. 221 filter, specifications. 224, 255 recommendations. 224 refill capacities. 256 specifications. 259, 261 Exhaust fumes. 141 F Fail safe cooling. 231 Floor mats. 71 Fluid capacities. 256 Foglamps. 44 Four-Wheel Drive vehicles. 152 driving off road. 155 electronic shift. 154 indicator light. 152 lever operated shift. 152 preparing to drive your vehicle. 143 Fuel. 233 calculating fuel economy. 237 cap. 235 capacity. 256 choosing the right fuel. 235 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates. 240 detergent in fuel. 237 filling your vehicle with fuel. 233, 235, 237 filter, specifications. 237, 255 fuel pump shut-off switch. 177 improving fuel economy. 237 octane rating. 236, 261–262 274 quality. 236 running out of fuel. 237 safety information relating to automotive fuels. 233 Fuel pump shut-off switch. 177 Fuses. 178–179 G Garage door opener. 56, 66 Gas cap (see Fuel cap). 235 Gas mileage (see Fuel economy). 237 Gauges. 16 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating). 163 calculating. 165 definition. 163 driving with a heavy load. 163 location. 163 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). 163 calculating. 163, 165 definition. 163 driving with a heavy load. 163 location. 163 H Hazard flashers. 177 Head restraints. 90 Headlamps. 44 aiming. 46 autolamp system. 44 bulb specifications. 48 daytime running lights. 45 flash to pass. 45 high beam. 45 replacing bulbs. 49 turning on and off. 44 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Index Heating heating and air conditioning system. 38–40 HomeLink universal transceiver (see Garage door opener). 66, 68–69 Hood. 217 I Ignition. 136, 261–262 Infant seats (see Safety seats). 123 Inspection/maintenance (I/M) testing. 242 Instrument panel cleaning. 212 cluster. 12 lighting up panel and interior. 46 J M Jack. 186 positioning. 186 storage. 186 Jump-starting your vehicle. 193 K Keyless entry system. 85 Keys positions of the ignition. 136 L Lamps autolamp system. 44 bulb replacement specifications chart. 48 cargo lamps. 46 daytime running light. 45 Manual transmission. 148 fluid capacities. 256 lubricant specifications. 261 reverse. 151 Mirrors. 55, 61 automatic dimming rearview mirror. 61 fold away. 62 side view mirrors (power). 61 Moon roof. 65 Motorcraft parts. 237, 255 O Octane rating. 236 Oil (see Engine oil). 221 275 fog lamps. 44 headlamps. 44 headlamps, flash to pass. 45 instrument panel, dimming. 46 interior lamps. 47–48 replacing bulbs. 48–53 Lane change indicator (see Turn signal). 46 Lights, warning and indicator. 12 anti-lock brakes (ABS). 141 speed control. 65 Load limits. 163 GAWR. 163 GVWR. 163 trailer towing. 163 Loading instructions. 165 Locks childproof. 78 Lubricant specifications. 259, 261 Lumbar support, seats. 92 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Index P Parking brake. 142 Parts (see Motorcraft parts). 255 Pedals (see Power adjustable foot pedals). 62 Power adjustable foot pedals. 62 Power distribution box (see Fuses). 182 Power door locks. 77 Power point. 58–59 Power steering. 142 fluid, checking and adding. 243 fluid, refill capacity. 256 fluid, specifications. 259, 261 Power Windows. 60 Preparing to drive your vehicle. 143 R Radio. 20, 22, 28, 32 Single CD. 22 Relays. 178 Remote entry system. 80 illuminated entry. 83 locking/unlocking doors. 77 Roadside assistance. 176 S Safety Belt Maintenance. 110 Safety belts (see Safety restraints). 98–103 Safety defects, reporting. 207 Safety restraints. 98–103 belt minder. 106 276 extension assembly. 110 for adults. 99–102 for children. 119–120 lap belt. 104 safety belt maintenance. 110 warning light and chime. 105–106 Safety seats for children. 123 Seat belts (see Safety restraints). 98 Seats. 90 child safety seats. 123 cleaning. 213 Servicing your vehicle. 216 Snowplowing. 7, 172–173 Spare tire (see Changing the Tire). 187 Spark plugs, specifications. 255, 261–262 Special notice. 8 ambulance conversions. 8 four-wheel drive vehicles. 174 utility-type vehicles. 8 Specification chart, lubricants. 259, 261 Speed control. 63 Starting your vehicle. 136–137, 140 jump starting. 193 Steering wheel tilting. 55 Stereo Single CD. 22 T Tailgate. 71–72 Tilt steering wheel. 55 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) Index Tires. 186, 251–252 changing. 186–188 checking the pressure. 252 replacing. 254 rotating. 253 snow tires and chains. 254 tire grades. 252 treadwear. 251 Tonneau cover. 73, 76 Towing. 165 recreational towing. 171 trailer towing. 165 Traction-lok rear axle. 143 Transfer case fluid checking. 249 Transmission automatic operation. 144 brake-shift interlock (BSI). 144 fluid, checking and adding (automatic). 245 fluid, checking and adding (manual). 248 fluid, refill capacities. 256 lubricant specifications. 259, 261 manual operation. 148 Trunk. 78 Turn signal. 46 V Vehicle dimensions. 262, 265 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). 267 Vehicle loading. 163 Ventilating your vehicle. 141 W Warning lights (see Lights). 12 Washer fluid. 221 Water, Driving through. 163 Windows power. 60 Windshield washer fluid and wipers. 54 checking and adding fluid. 221 replacing wiper blades. 54 277 2003 F150 (f12) Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) USA English (fus) 278 279 280
Read more: jiffy lube emissions coupon

2004 Ford f150 owners manual

2016 Ford F-150 - Owner's Manual (505 pages), 2004 ford f150 owners manual Ford F150 Owner's Manual, 2004 ford f150 owners manual This manual also for: FREE Ford OWNER'S MANUAL PDF, 2004 ford...

2002 Ford f150 owners manual

Ford 2002 F-150 Owner's Manual, 2002 ford f150 owners manual Summary of Contents for Ford 2002 F-150 Comments to this Manuals FREE Ford OWNER'S MANUAL PDF, 2002 ford f150 owners manual Ford...

2005 Ford f150 owners manual

Ford SVT F-150 Owner's Manual, 2005 ford f150 owners manual This manual also for: Ford F-150 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 Factory Repair Manual -eleventh generation, 2005 ford f150 owners manual...

2001 Ford f150 owners manual

2001 F150 Fuse Box Diagram, 2001 ford f150 owners manual Navbar Menu, 2001 ford f150 owners manual 2001 F150 Fuse Box Diagram, 2001 ford f150 owners manual Footer, 2001 ford f150 owners manual...

1999 Ford f150 fuse diagram

Ford Fuse Box Diagrams, 1999 ford f150 fuse diagram Free Ford Fuse Box Diagrams, 1999 ford f150 fuse diagram Ford F-150: Fuse Box Diagram, 1999 ford f150 fuse diagram Fuse Type Locating the...

пятница, 21 октября 2016 г.

2003 Ford f150 owners manual

Car service repair manuals, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Ford F-150 1997-2003 Factory Service Repair Manual PDF, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Ford 2003 F150 Owner's Manual, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

This manual also for:

FREE Ford OWNER'S MANUAL PDF, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Ford OWNER'S MANUAL

Leading Competitor

Who wants the 97-03 Factory Repair Manual?, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Navbar Menu, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Who wants the 97-03 Factory Repair Manual?, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Related Topics, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Footer, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

2001 F150 Fuse Box Diagram, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Navbar Menu, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

2001 F150 Fuse Box Diagram, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Footer, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Ford Car manuals, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Popular Ford Car manuals

Company

Using our site

Contact us

Connect with us

Find retailer

Other Haynes sites

Additional Disclosures

Get Started, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Orders, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Parts and Service, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Contact Us, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

More Ford, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

2016 Ford Expedition - Owner's Manual (421 pages), 2003 ford f150 owners manual

Instructions for your ACCESS® Roll-Up Cover & Accessories, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

ACCESS® Installation and Owner's Manual:

LITERIDER® Installation and Owner's Manual:

LORADO® Installation and Owner's Manual:

VANISH® Installation and Owner's Manual:

TONNOSPORT® Installation and Owner’s Manual:

Chevy/GMC Special Instruction Insert:

Dodge Special Instruction Insert:

Ford Special Instruction Insert:

2003 Ford f150 Owners Manual, 2003 ford f150 owners manual

related

Related Articles

Комментариев нет:

Отправить комментарий

пятница, 21 октября 2016 г.

Ford OWNER'S
MANUAL

Leading
Competitor